JP2019058817A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can suppress a decrease in game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a lottery about a game, variably displays symbols on the basis of a result of lottery to notify that the game is in progress, and stop displays the symbols to notify that the game is over, is controlled into a profit imparting state that profit is imparted when game media pass a specific area in a game area, and is controlled into a normal game or an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state when the profit imparting state is over. When the lottery result is a specific result and a lottery result that the game state after the profit imparting state is over can be controlled into the advantageous game state more advantageous than the normal game state while the lottery is performed for the prescribed number of times is obtained, being controllable into the advantageous game state is notified within as small the number of lottery times as possible in which notification becomes possible after control into the advantageous state is started.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  Conventionally, as one of the gaming machines, it becomes a big hit when the main digital becomes a specific aspect, and it plays a role by winning in a game machine (type 1 pachinko machine) where an attacker opens and a large number of prize balls can be obtained The pachinko of the 1 type 2 type composite machine which mixes two elements of the game machine (old 2 type pachinko machine) where many balls are obtained when the game ball passes to the specified area by the release of the thing and the release of the property. A machine is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-014442 A

  However, with the above-described gaming machine, it is becoming difficult to satisfy the player who seeks further amusement because it is not new.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement by solving such conventional problems.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a firing means capable of firing game media in the game area, a lottery means for performing a lottery concerning a game, and a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result. Pass control means for controlling the passage area to allow passage of game media to a special area in the game area, and payout means capable of delivering at least one more game media than the number of game media having passed the special area, A specific area detecting means for detecting that a game medium has passed through a specific area provided in a predetermined area, and a profit giving state in which a profit is provided when the specific area detecting means detects the passage of a game medium It is the said specific result by the profit provision control means to control, and the lottery means, and the gaming state after the end of the profit provision state is the normal gaming letter while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times And an advantageous notification means capable of notifying that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled when a lottery result indicating that the more advantageous advantageous gaming state can be controlled is obtained, the advantageous notification means comprising It is characterized in that the notification can be performed within as few times as possible of the lottery that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest by realizing novel game characteristics.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning mouth unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a prize-winning mouth unit from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the winning opening unit disassembled into main components and viewed afterward. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of the prize-winning mouth unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacking unit and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting opening unit of the winning opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a variable starting opening unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting opening unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the variable starting opening unit as viewed after being disassembled; It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit retracted | saved from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit advanced. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the prize item unit of the prize-winning mouth unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the prize unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is an AA sectional view in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize winning opening unit of the prize unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize product winning opening unit and it looked at after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V prize-winning mouth unit of the prize unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning a prize mouth unit and was seen after. (A) is an explanatory view showing, from the front side, a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body of the V winning opening unit faces the receiving side, and (b) a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body faces the V winning opening It is an explanatory view shown from the front side. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball of the right side in the game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit, (b) is a gaming ball in the state where the starting opening door member was advanced It is an explanatory view showing a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit from the left front, (b) is a gaming ball in the state where the starting opening door member was advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from left front, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state in which the starting opening door member is back from a left front. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front side the flow of the game ball when the prize winning opening is acceptable in the prize unit, and (b) is a V prize winning opening of the rotating body in the V prize winning unit It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball when it faces the side from the front side. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination result of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 1st starting opening detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd starting opening detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate detection process of a main control board. It is a figure showing a flow chart of special symbol processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit judging processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fluctuation pattern setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal symbol processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening door process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the opening rotation control processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the opening rotation control processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening opening control processing of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production | presentation control processing of a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production | presentation control processing of a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production | presentation control processing of a periphery control board.

First Embodiment of the Present Invention
[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-like main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball T (see FIG. 122, FIG. 123 etc.) is struck as a game medium A door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 is provided so as to close the front of the frame 3 and the game board 4 from the player side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball T arranged under the game window 101 And a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 in which the game ball T is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. Further, in the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and in a state where the gaming ball T is stored in the upper tray 301, the player handles the handle device 500. When the player rotates the player, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and a player can play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. It is possible not to touch the game ball T or the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98) in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like by inserting a hand or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 10). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger grip, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13, and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a hitting operation of the game ball T and a door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. In order to close the game window 101 to the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 attached to the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 mounted on the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 mounted on the rear side of the door cover base unit 100 And a glass unit 590 to be mounted.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 1113 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wiring holding member 197 holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control board provided on the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 1116, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 1116 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the bowl unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 1101, the peripheral control board 1116, etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 61).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. Ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 through the front and back direction at a predetermined position. Handle for attaching the handle bracket 140 by tilting it so that the ball feed opening 113 for feeding to the right and the right (open side) end of the front located at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wiring passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the mounting portion 114 and the handle mounting portion 114 and through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 upper by being formed shorter extended cylindrical shape toward forward below the dollar mounting portion 114 is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window, and the glass unit locking member 190 which protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 are at appropriate positions. It is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 1113 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control board 1116, the payout control board 1101, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360 Handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. The door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high security against fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 63). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. While it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and to prevent the bending of only the pivotally supporting reinforcing metal plate 152, the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 1116, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (emission drive signals) from the peripheral control substrate 1116 , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 1116, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control substrate 1116. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 33 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and the upper extension of the front decorative member 281 An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, within the frame of the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[1-2 E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and is stored in the upper plate 301. The game balls T can be supplied to the ball hitting and launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the right lower surface and having a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface. And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover member 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the rear side 338a and project the front side.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls T attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; The lower ball ball pulling mechanism 350 for pulling out the gaming ball T attached to the lower surface of the lower plate 302 and stored in the lower plate 302, and mounted on the upper left side in the front view of the dish unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 And a ball rental unit 360 for operating the ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; illustration is omitted).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing the game balls T by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball T can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The height difference of the ball is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball T stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540. However, since the game ball T can not come out straight into the upper plate 301 forward from the ball ball supply port 310c, the paid out game ball T abuts on the game ball T which closed the front side of the ball ball supply port 310c. The rolling direction changes, and it is induced to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball T stored in the upper tray 301. It will be released. Thus, the game ball T can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so when the game ball T blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c, the player manually holds the game ball T It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls T paid out in the upper plate 301 without shifting the game player, and the player may feel bothersome about the storage of the game balls T on the upper plate 301. While being able to control, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game by the hitting operation of the game ball T and the game ball T which is thrown in, it is possible to control the decrease in interest to the game, The storage capacity of T can be increased.

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g due to the gaming balls T in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more The game balls T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The game ball T, which is formed to be positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, and is supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, is guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It is supposed to be

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball T is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  In addition, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. Further, the lower plate lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 It has a plate-like part that forms The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side It has become. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball T passing through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view And a ball removing passage 344c through which the game ball T can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball T stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit via the feed opening 113 and the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to 580.

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thereby, the gaming ball T stored in the upper tray 301 is transferred from the upper tray ball outlet 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper tray ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and the lower bowl ball supply port 310g from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. Can be discharged into the

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for biasing the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 or the like Can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing off at the dividing portion 583a.

  The lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 is disposed between the lower disc side cover 330 and the lower disc lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower disc body 324 to form a bottom central portion of the disc unit 300. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the extraction base 351 and the lower tray ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower disk sphere extraction hole 324b of the lower disk body 324 And a lower disc ball extraction button 354, which is attached to the front end of the lower disc ball extraction slider 353. There is.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a which can close the lower ball ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide slider 353, or the lower opening ball slide slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, the game balls T can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball out button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide out of the lower disc ball out slider 353 opens and closes. The shutter 352 rotates against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls T stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball T stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower tray sphere extraction button 354 is not kept pressed while being held in a state where it matches the removal hole 3324 b.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball T can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls T are put on a bowl unit when a cash or prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then the ball rental button 361 is pressed. While being able to lend (pay out) in the upper plate 301 of 300, when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount will be returned ing. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 covering the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363 and a lending remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365 and a lending ball button 361. And a return unit 362 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and a back side of the transfer unit base 366 covering the back side of the transfer unit base 366 And a rear cover 367 attached to the The crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball-sending unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball-sending unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the ball-sending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m A transparent front cover 365 having a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365 and a forwardly projecting protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and closing the display opening 310n. The loan remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301 Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. Instead, it is possible to participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; Have. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from coming upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is mounted on the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is mounted on the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step 407a and the projection 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, so that problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented and the dial drive means 414 can be prevented. Be able to withstand high loads , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing the game balls T, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is stored in order to reliably store a large number of game balls T. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the rear handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball T is struck. It can be done. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be hit. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch power supply substrate 831 causes the rotary drive of the launch solenoid 654 to stop. It is supposed to be. As a result, the firing of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the single-shot button 520 is released before the single-shot button 520 is operated. The game ball T can be launched with a hitting strength of.

  The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotational operation of the handle main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of trouble in the joint unit, to control that the fun of the player decreases due to the hitting trouble of the game ball T Thereby making it possible.

[1-2 H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by the game ball T paid out from the award ball unit 700 to be described later The game ball T (fall ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 despite that is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 which is open on the front side and has a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls T inside, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the cover base in communication with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of 542 toward the front as viewed from the front, and a second ball inlet 542c disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a And a second ball inlet 542c which is in communication with the second ball passage 542d and which extends downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposing positions (see FIG. 61 etc.). In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball T An accommodation space 546 capable of accommodating a predetermined amount of gaming balls T is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball T to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of the present example is a game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It can be supplied from the outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 via the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is configured to play the game ball T supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. The lower tray 302 can be supplied from the outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 via the lower tray sphere supply rod 310h and the lower tray sphere supply port 310g of the tray unit 300.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball T fired by the hit ball launcher 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it can be received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the gaming ball T received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d ( Can be supplied).

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546, and can be pivotably covered by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. The swinging member 548 pivotally supported by 542, the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the swinging of the swinging member 548, and the swinging member 548 are biased in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 does not detect. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game balls T.

  In this example, the game balls T paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540. If the game ball T is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, the ball is stuck in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of 774 is also full, the game ball T is distributed to the full passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). The second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 from the full tank outlet 776 of the unit 770 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and the storage space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The delayed game balls T are stored. Furthermore, as many gaming balls T are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many gaming balls T are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the gaming balls T acts on the swinging member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 At the same time, the upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the gaming ball T from the winning ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 1101 (see FIG. 125), A notification is issued to urge the player to discharge the game balls T in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball T in the housing space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the ball hitting and firing device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. T can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by the operation of the upper plate ball release button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 And a box-like front cover 581 having a ball opening 581b open on the lower side of the entrance 581a and the opening 581a and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front open And a rear cover 582 having a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction and entering from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581; A partition that is pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between front covers 581 and that divides the entrance 581a from the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581 The ball removing member 583 having the 83a and the gaming balls T on the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply opening 582a of the back cover, vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the extended axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized so as to be able to hold one game ball T. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and enters the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the game ball T to the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the gaming ball T remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one gaming ball T, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state). The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launcher 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch power supply substrate 831 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In the normal state, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball T does not intrude into the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball T entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper countersink base 344 of the dish unit 300. And is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Even if the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper ball ball slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, the ball ball 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged and the game ball It is possible to prevent T from bouncing back at the partition 583a.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in the back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud preventing member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance in the passage. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 605. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the gaming balls T are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5 is played When the player operates, the game ball T is sent to the hit ball launcher 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the hit ball launcher 650. The game is played in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game window 101, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or the like on the back surface of the door frame base unit 100) Since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the discharging mechanism (ball pulling member 583) is disposed, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 58 are arranged. In addition, the ball feed member 584 and the hitting and launching apparatus 650 are as close as possible, and when the game ball T in the upper tray 301 is discharged by the operation of the upper flat ball release button 341, the ball feed member 584 side The number of remaining game balls T can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased. It is possible to suppress the game ball T in the upper plate 301 disappearing prematurely by the loading operation and prevent the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game ball T at an early stage, and the game in the upper plate 301 Since it is possible to reduce the pleasure of being reduced by reducing the player's feeling that the ball T feels troublesome, it is possible to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, The pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively large (wide) in the game area 1100 and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified. With the gaming ball T, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if a problem occurs in the above, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is operated to be pressed downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate It is possible to stop the discharge of the game ball T from the box 301, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper plate ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball withdrawal) Durability of the member 583 can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the dividing portion 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper countersinking slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to collide even if it collides with the dividing portion 583a. It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 or the like from being damaged and the occurrence of a problem due to the splashing.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partitioning portion 583a is slid, the movement of the partitioning portion 583a when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partitioning portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl sphere removing button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, Similar effects can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the partitioning member 583a of the ball removing member 583 is pivoted through the pivoting collar portion 583b, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is pivoted. By dispersing the force by the portion 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating flange portion 583 b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when the gaming ball T in the upper tray 301 is ejected, the gaming ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. In the ball feeding unit 580, the game ball T can be discharged well by improving the path of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removal member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[1-2 J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2 K. Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. At the same time, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is driven to the right of the lower plate 302 in the front view right side of the lower plate 302 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the game window 101 A handle assembly 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side have a sharp metallic artificial appearance and It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper dish right upper decoration member 319 for decoration of the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball release button 341 can be luminously decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 59 and FIG. 60) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player is given a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing gaming state, a time saving gaming state, a probability changing time short playing status , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and the game ball T attached to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 When the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 Sphere blocking the flow And a mouth closing unit 790,.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side which protrudes to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; A positioning projection 607 projecting upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the gaming panel 1112 in the gaming board 4 The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. The game balls T are received at the ball inlet 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls T to be distributed. The body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game ball T that has flowed the ball extraction passage 741d in the award ball device 740, which will be described later in detail. Is supposed to circulate.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The hit ball launcher 650 can strike the game ball T supplied from the ball feed unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. It is.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end At the same time as the 658 is made passable, the game ball T can form a gap through which the game ball T can not pass, and the game ball T is held at the base end of the firing rail 660 It is possible that the ball 槌 656 (tip 658) pivots toward the firing rail 660 side than the ball hitting position where the ball can be hit at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the locking piece 662 and the ball locking piece 662 And a stopper 664 for regulating.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball T hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660 . The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and launching device 650 of this example jumps over the far space 626 on the left side of the front view side of the firing rail 660 and fires the gaming ball T, thereby bringing the gaming ball T into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4. It can be driven in. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. The game ball T which has become a far ball without being driven into the inside falls the far space 626, is received to the far ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch power substrate 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls T to the hit ball launcher 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game balls T when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is started from that state. The ball feeding member 584 sends the game ball T received to the ball hitting device 650 side when the driving of the ball is released (OFF), so the ball feeding solenoid 585 of this ball feeding unit 580 fires the solenoid substantially at the same time By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball 656. It is possible to

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined amounts of game balls after storing the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is paid out to the upper tray 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the instruction. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear face of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the top rear face of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls T supplied from the island equipment side. A tank rail unit 730 for aligning the gaming balls T arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending them downstream, and the gaming balls T aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to pay out based on a predetermined payout instruction and the gaming ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball T When it comes to, it is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game balls T paid out to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b And an award ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball T paid out from the award ball device 740 downward, adjacent to the award ball device attachment portion 714, And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721 and an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes in a rectangular shape only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) from the bottom wall 710 in plan view; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 , A rod-like shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a base portion of the shaft portion 725 near the base end and outer circumferential wall 722 on both front sides Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722 of the award ball tank 720, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, in the award ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to become lower toward the discharge port 723 and the gaming ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723 It is supposed to be.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 to be described later, and the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and can prevent the game ball T from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, Dust and the like can be prevented from entering the tank rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls T can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 side from the discharge port 723 The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls T can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction, and the end on the left side (axial support side) in front view The bottom is inclined to lower the part. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled leftward to be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 rolling toward the discharge port 731 a A piece 735 and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game balls T in the tank rail 731 are provided. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls T discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball straightening member 727 are smoothed so as to be single-staged and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b It is possible to Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball T which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrow as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so that it becomes.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game ball T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T aligned in two rows alternate one by one It is sent to the prize ball device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the game ball T fall downward from the narrow groove It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball T comes in contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and it becomes possible to stop the game ball T being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. ing.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply that opens at the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball T, as shown. The passage 741a, the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and the rear end (open side) of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end in the rear view and bent in a substantially U shape It has a prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side of the view, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end on the right side (axially supported side) of the distribution space 741b in a back view and extending downward and opening at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and the out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of the gaming ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the gaming ball T attached to the unit base 741 circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotations, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a payout motor 744, a ball breakage switch 750, a count sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 relayed on the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 1101 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 And.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741 a of the unit base 741 An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be removable from the unit base 741 And an attach / detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741 a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the force of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is alleviated. It is possible to Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and is present in the supply passage 741a When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball T, the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the out-of-ball switch 741e. When the gaming ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball breakage switch 741e (ball breakage state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the ball breakage is a player or the like. It is reported to the hall side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is removed. It can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a of a size that can accommodate one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotation By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball extraction passage 741d side. . Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 1113 or a lending command from the CR unit 6 is input to the payout control substrate 1101, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated, or the like. 744 rotates, and a predetermined number of gaming balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side. It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls T in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout is made. The game balls T dispensed to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls T in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body The game balls T paid out to the ball removal passage 741d by 748 are the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, It is possible to discharge to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls T are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls T can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. The prize ball receptacle 771 for receiving the game ball T flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball receptacle 771 and expanded in the left and right direction (see FIG. 79) ), The normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T directly from the bottom of the winning ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball T which has flowed through the normal passage 773 A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the front end right end of the front end, and a full channel 775 for guiding the game ball T forward from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 Figure 9 and the reference), and includes full Tan passage 775 game balls T which has flowed through the full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged to the front, the.

  Furthermore, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball T that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the rear end upper portion and flows down the ball extraction passage 741 d of the prize ball device 740; The ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the gaming ball T received in the ball extraction receptacle 777 to the front side and the gaming ball T flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball at the left end in front view An outlet 774 and a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball T, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, and is usually discharged from the ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 and the dish unit 300. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 of the tray and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. There is. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball T released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base It is delivered to the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of 600.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receptacle 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the gaming ball T which has entered the prize ball receptacle 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball T, which has flowed into the passage 773, normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and the first ball outlet 544a It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the first of the far cover unit 540 The game ball T which has not been able to come out from the ball outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 is stagnated in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit The inside is full. In this state, the gaming ball T which has entered into the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter into the passage 773 and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball T enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the bowl unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540. The lower tray 302 is to be supplied.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  Thus, when the gaming ball T becomes full in the upper tray 301, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example receives the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 until the full tank is eliminated. Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball T is supplied to the ball hitting and launching device by filling the upper plate and operating the ball extraction button of the upper plate as in a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being interrupted and to stop the game ball T from being interrupted, and it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is directly below the winning ball device 740, that is, the passage of the gaming ball T paid out at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls T accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls T in the upper tray 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773 are branched. Is a game ball T that can be directly hit by the ball firing device 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the volume of the upper plate 301 and the volume of the normal passage 773. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper tray 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper tray in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball T in the main frame 3 At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame is provided with only one storage tray. Even if it is changed to 5, since the game ball T paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, the time lag from payout to storage is reduced. So that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to a lack of game balls T for hitting, and to be able to cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes. It has become.

  In addition, since the gaming balls T paid out from the winning ball device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301 unless the upper tray 301 is full, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls T stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is set. It is possible to reduce the amount, and the player can concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls T, and the player is not frequently made to worry about the storage amount. While being able to play a game, without changing the main body frame 3 side, it can be made to respond to the door frame 5 provided with a different number of storage dishes, and the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full with the game ball T. Even if the game ball T does not come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 can be The amount of storage of the substantial game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray is filled with the game balls T and the game balls T can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776. Also, since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal passage 773 but also the full tank passage 775 is The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls T in each door frame 5 is not changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as many as possible and can be sufficiently adapted to different door frames 5.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls T to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball T in the full tank branch unit 770 (storage amount ) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount obtained by combining the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls T in the main body frame 3.

  Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and there is a problem. When it occurs, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 The flow of the game ball T can be blocked.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Because it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball T spills from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank ball outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls T can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. Also, the substrate base unit 810 transfers the gaming balls T flowing down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810. It can be sent.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing the combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving of the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is Interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to be performed easily. Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the firing power supply substrate 831 separate from the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. Since the firing power supply substrate 831 (launching power supply substrate box 830) can be easily replaced when replacing the game board 4, an electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like which can realize the implantation characteristics matched to the concept of the new model to be replaced, etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the DC / DC converter 831a, it is possible to match the launch characteristics of the hitting launch device 650 previously provided in the main frame 3 with the new game board 4 it can. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball T can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model, and the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the firing power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, etc. While being able to simplify, it can exchange in a short time, and it can control that the burden on the game hall side increases. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the cost for changing the driving characteristics is reduced compared to the case where the entire dispensing control substrate 1101 is replaced. The burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they were before, so the long-term use allows When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like is deteriorated, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced to eliminate the malfunction. As well as being able to shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, it is also possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, the player It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game of.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 is opened upward at the left front of the left and right center as viewed from the front, and is discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4. A discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging, a side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) Of the power supply substrate box 850 is formed such that the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is recessed to the front side, and the front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward on the front surface of the power supply substrate box 830 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The back side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game ball T which has flowed down and the game ball T which is discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and is received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail, after the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 It is possible to discharge the side downward.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  Power supply substrate box 850 and power supply substrate holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is absent. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853 It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And a delivery control substrate 1101 (see FIG. 125) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 1101 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). In addition, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 1113 and the like are configured to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. It can be

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a peripheral control board 1116 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control board 1116 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 1103a of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4, the test terminal 1103b, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1103 c (see FIG. 5) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1103 facing the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and for confirmation The sealing portion 1103 d of the main control board box 1103 is exposed through the notch portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, control state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 1113 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. The through holes 918 close the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the game board 4 It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 1116 and the like provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control board 1116 and the like can be exhausted well. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball T, so that the gaming ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 elastically engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 and the door frame The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned with each other and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the sliding of the main frame After inserting the wedge 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing to the opening 1029 with a screw not shown.

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to make the back wall of the prize ball base. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the section 710b and the gaming ball T discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction After the payout ball base 710 It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall 710b, and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface thereof is a tank rail unit 730 or a prize ball device 74. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane as the rear face of the game board, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be inspected (visually inspected) easily without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4 It can be a pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball T can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from intruding into the pachinko machine 1 through the like, etc., and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball T.

[2. Configuration of the game board]
The gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to a frame-shaped front component 1111 partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 1100 and to the rear of the front component 1111. And a flat-shaped game panel 1112 for partitioning the rear end side of the game area 1100.

  The outer peripheral shape of the front component member 1111 is a quadrangle, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semicircular arc shape on the left side and a substantially U shape on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in front view. The front component 1111 forms a first inner wall 1111a smoothly connected to the entire semicircular arc-shaped portion on the inner circumferential surface and the portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion, A second inner wall portion 1111 b is formed by connecting the remaining vertically extending portions and the lower left and right extending portions of the U-shaped portion to each other in an L shape. In addition, the front component 1111 is a guiding wall extending in an arc along the first inner wall 1111a from the lower end (left end in front view) of the second inner wall 1111b (the left end in the front view) And 1111 c, and a non-return piece 1111 d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guiding wall 1111 c.

  In the game panel 1112, an out port 1112 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in front view. The out port 1112 a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111 b of the front component 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111 c are connected. In addition, in the game panel 1112, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed substantially at the center of the game area 1100.

  In addition, the game board 4 includes a substrate holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the substrate holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. The main control board 1113 (see FIG. 125) housed inside controls the game content, and the gaming state etc. is displayed based on the control signal from the main control board 1113 and the function attached to the front component 1111 And a display 1114.

  Furthermore, the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115, which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front through the opening of the game panel 1112 and main control And a peripheral control substrate 1116 for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the substrate 1113. In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 1120 attached to the front of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1112 (see FIG. 6). And.

  The front unit 1120 is attached at a substantial center of the game area 1100 in a front view and divides the game area 1100 into left and right, and a prize hole attached to the lower side of the center article 1130. And a unit 1150.

[2-1. Center feature]
The center character 1130 is formed in a frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening of the game panel 1112. The center character 1130 releases the warp entrance 1131 to which the gaming ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left in front view, and the gaming ball T which has entered the warp entrance 1131 and opens at the lower part in the center in the horizontal direction in front view And a warp outlet 1132.

  The center character 1130 is a right channel 1133 through which the game ball T can flow in the right side in a front view, and a gate member 1134 disposed in the right channel 1133 and through which the game ball T can pass. And a gate sensor 1135 for detecting passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134.

  The right channel 1133 of the center character 1130 is opened upward on the lower side of the stopper 1111e where the first inner wall 1111a and the second inner wall 1111b at the upper right corner in the front view intersect in the front component 1111 A gate of a predetermined size connected to the entrance 1133a, the entrance path 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, and the lower end of the entrance path 1133b and the gate member 1134 is disposed at the center A space 1133c, a guiding path 1133d for guiding the gaming ball T downward along a portion of the second inner wall 1111b of the front component 1111 from the lower end of the gate space 1133c, and a lower end of the guiding path 1133d And an outlet 1133 e for releasing the ball T downward.

  In the right channel 1133, the entrance 1133a is larger than the outside diameter of the game ball T, and the entrance path 1133b following the entrance 1133a is slightly wider than the outside diameter of the game ball T at the lower end. It is formed to be narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c is greatly expanded vertically and horizontally on the lower side of the entrance path 1133b, and the gate space 1133c is formed in such a width that the game ball T can flow down on both left and right sides of the gate member 1134 disposed substantially at the center. In the gate space 1133 c, the gate member 1134 is disposed at a position slightly closer to the front in the front view than directly below the approach path 1133 b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133 c is inclined so as to be lower toward the right in the front view, and the upper end of the guiding path 1133 d is opened at the lowermost right end.

  The guiding path 1133 d extends in an arc along the vertically extending portion of the second inner wall 1111 b of the front component 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the inner wall of the guide path 1133d is provided with a plurality of projections, and the outflow velocity of the game ball T can be suppressed by contacting the game balls T with these projections. The guide path 1133 d extends downward to about half the height of the entire height of the game area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly leftward in front view.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the winning opening unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is disposed below the outlet 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center character 1130 and can receive the game ball T at all times, and the warp outlet 1132 of the center character 1130. A first start opening 1152 which is disposed on the lower side and can always receive the game ball T, and a second start opening which is disposed on the right side of the first start opening 1152 in front view and always opens into the game area 1100 A special winning opening 1154 which is disposed below the first starting opening 1152 and can be received by the game ball T by opening and closing according to the gaming state, and is disposed on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 in front view It is arranged under the prize winning opening 1155 and the prize winning opening 1155 that the gaming ball T can receive by opening and closing according to the gaming state, and the prize winning opening 115 Includes a V winning opening 1156 that is capable accepted, the game balls T received in.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a flat base plate 1160 provided on the front surface of the game panel 1112 and mounted on the front surface of the base plate 1160, as shown in FIGS. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a flow path of the game ball T, and a transparent front mounted on the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161 An attacker unit 1200 disposed at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and provided with a large winning opening 1154 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and the front surface of the attacker unit 1200 The variable start is disposed at the upper right of the view and provided with the second start port 1153 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. A combination unit 1220 which is disposed on the right side of the opening unit 1210 and the variable start opening unit 1210 as viewed from the front and equipped with a prize winning opening 1155 and a V prize opening 1156 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 And have.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the gaming ball T received in the first starting opening 1152 downward, and the first starting opening 1161 Ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the guide member 1163 for detecting the game ball T received in the first start opening 1152, and an LED mounted on the front side of the first start opening 1152 The first start opening decoration substrate 1165, the substrate stay 1166 supporting the first start opening decoration substrate 1165 and attached to the first start opening guide member 1163, and a base at a lower position of the attacker unit 1200 A large winning opening decoration substrate 1167 mounted on the rear side of the plate 1160 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  Further, the winning opening unit 1150 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting opening 1153 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a second starting opening. A starting opening reflector 1169 covering the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and attached to the variable starting opening unit 1210 and a rear end of the base plate 1160 at a lower position of the variable starting opening unit 1210 and a second starting opening 1153 A second starting opening guide member 1170 for guiding the gaming ball T received in the lower direction, and a second starting opening guide member 1170 attached to the second starting opening 1153 to detect the gaming ball T received The ball detection sensor (not shown) and the rear side of the second starting opening guide member 1170 are attached, and the attacher solenoid 1204 of the attacher unit 1200 and The first relay board 1172 relaying the connection between the start port solenoid 1215 of the start port unit 1210 and the main control board 1113 and the back side of the first relay board 1172 are attached to the back side of the second start port guide member 1170 And the substrate cover 1173 being provided.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the character unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the character unit 1220, and the character unit cover 1174, and of the character unit cover 1174 on the upper side of the character winning hole 1155. A prize winning prize decorative plate 1175 arranged on the front upper part and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a prize winning prize mounted on a prize unit cover 1174 covering the front side of the prize winning prize decoration substrate 1175 A mouth reflector 1176, a vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front of the accessory unit cover 1174, and a lower part of the front of the accessory unit cover 1174 the vibration sensor 1177 and the prize winning solenoid 1225 of the prize unit 1220 And a second relay for relaying the connection between the V prize solenoid 1232 and the main control board 1113 A plate 1178, a guide member 1179 for a general winning opening attached to the rear side of the character unit cover 1174 and guiding the gaming ball T received in the general winning hole 1151 downward, and a guiding member 1179 for a general winning opening And a general winning opening sensor 1180 (see FIG. 125) for detecting the game ball T attached to the general winning opening 1151.

  The base plate 1160 of the winning opening unit 1150 protrudes forward in the upper portion of the left portion in the front view and is open at the top and the rear, and has a receiving portion 1160a forming the first starting opening 1152 and a receiving portion 1160a. An attacker opening 1160b which penetrates from the lower side to the front and back and extends to the left and right, and a large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 to be described later is inserted from the rear side A second start-up opening 1160c which penetrates back and forth and the second start-up port 1153 faces the rear side, and extends in a slit shape penetrating leftwardly from the second start-up opening 1160c to be described later The door opening 1160 d and the door opening 1160 d above the door slit 1160 d, through which the front side of the engine opening door member 1214 of the engine opening unit 1210 can pass, is the engine opening reflector 116. Comprises of a second start hole upper shelf emitting decorative unit 1160e emitted decorated on the left and right on the front side and a position by arrayed has been and second start hole LED decorative substrate 1168, the.

  Moreover, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the second starting opening upper shelf light emission decoration part 1160e, and forms the prize winning hole 1155 of the prize winning hole unit 1220A in the prize unit 1220 described later It is inserted so that the front part of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 protrudes forward from the rear side, and the prize winning hole reflector 1176 is located above the prize winning hole opening 1160 f. The character winning hole luminous decoration part 1160g which is lined up in the right and left in the front position and lighted and decorated by the LED of the character winning hole decoration board 1175 and penetrates back and forth under the character winning hole opening 1160f The ball guide member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B in the character product unit 1220, which will be described later, is inserted so as to project forward from the rear side. And the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the form of a bowl extending backward at the top of the right portion in a front view and opened upward. And a hook portion 1160i which is guided rearward and is delivered to the general winning opening guide member 1179.

  The front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front play area 1100, and is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear is open with the flat front plate portion 1161a as the front surface. ing. The front flow path forming member 1161 is open at the upper right and front at the upper right of the front view, and guides the gaming ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form the general winning opening 1151, and the receiving portion 1161 b A shelf-like receiving portion lower shelf portion which is separated downward by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the right side to the extension of the left side of the receiving portion 1161b from the right side to the receiving portion 1161b 1161c, a receiving portion lower right standing wall portion 1161d extending downward from the left end of the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning opening 1155, and a distance from the receiving portion 1161b to the left in front view more than the outside diameter of the game ball T The position of the game ball T from the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize winning opening unit 1220A below the jack receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c and above the prize winning opening 1155 From the lower end of the receiver left upright wall 1161e extending vertically to the upper end of the receiver left upright wall 1161e and along the upper side of the prize winning opening 1155 from the lower end of the prize winning opening 1155 And an award winning opening upper ceiling portion 1161 f extending leftward to the upper side.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered leftward from a position in contact with the left end of the prize winning opening 1155 (prize winning prize opening and closing member 1221) lower than the left end of the prize winning opening upper ceiling portion 1161 f A second winning opening area right standing wall 1161h extending vertically below the second starting opening 1153 from the right end of the winning combination left opening 1161g and the right opening of the left winning combination 1161g A second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i extends leftward so that the left side is lower from the lower end of the second starting opening area right standing wall 1161h to the left end of the front flow passage forming member 1161.

  Furthermore, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated to the left side by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161h and from the upper surface of the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g It extends leftward to a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the second starting opening lower shelf 1161i so that the left side becomes lower from a position separated downward by a distance larger than the outer diameter of T The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j disposed at a position immediately above the second starting opening 1153 and the lower end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j so as to cover the right side of the second starting opening 1153. The outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161k, the guiding piece 1161l projecting leftwardly from the second starting opening right rising wall 1161k, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j Than And a, a second start hole area left vertical wall 1161m extending vertically to a position downward from the upper position than the second start hole upper shelf portion 1161j are separated into slightly larger left.

  The winning opening unit 1150 of this embodiment includes a ball detecting sensor 1164 attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163 and a ball detecting sensor 1208 attached to the attacker unit 1200 described later. A first starting opening sensor 1190 is formed to detect the game ball T received by the motor 1152. Further, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second start opening guide member 1170 and a ball detection sensor 1213 described later attached to the variable start opening unit 1210 are received in the second start opening 1153. A second starting opening sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

  In addition, although details will be described later, the winning opening unit 1150 includes a special winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received by the special winning opening 1154 of the attacker unit 1200, and a prize winning opening 1155 of the bonus unit 1220. A prize winning opening sensor 1224 for detecting the accepted gaming ball T and a V prize opening sensor 1239 for sensing the gaming ball T accepted by the V prize opening 1156 of the prize unit 1220 are provided.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
The attacking unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 mainly opens in the front as shown in FIGS. Attacker lower base 1201 forming the lower part, and attacker upper base 1202 attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and attached to the base plate 1160 and forming the upper part of the large winning opening 1154, the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker A large winning opening opening and closing member 1203 supported rotatably around an axis extending in the left and right direction by the base 1202 and opening and closing the large winning opening 1154, and mounted between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 Atsushi who has a plunger 1204a which is advanced and retracted according to the game state A link member 1205 for transmitting and receiving the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 and the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 and a game ball which is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and received in the prize opening 1154 A special winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting T, a guide member 1207 attached to the lower side of the attacker lower base 1201 and guiding the gaming ball T detected by the special winning opening sensor 1206 backward, and of the upper attack carrier base 1202 And a ball detection sensor 1208 attached to the upper portion for detecting the game ball T received by the first starting opening 1152.

  The large winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a length of 4 to 6 times the length of the gaming ball T in the front-view horizontal direction and a length slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball T in the vertical direction. Is opened forward, and the opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped large winning opening opening and closing member 1203. In the special winning opening 1154, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 becomes substantially vertical, the game ball T can not be received When the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state, it is a so-called variable winning opening that is capable of receiving the game ball T.

  The attacker lower base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and extends vertically through the bottom wall of the horizontally elongated box lower housing 1201a and the lower housing 1201a with the front and upper open. A through hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c which is formed on the lower side of the through hole 1201b and into which the large winning hole sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side of both left and right ends of the lower portion 1201a. It is formed in a U shape on the pair of bearing lower parts 1201 d arranged, the solenoid support part 1201 e formed on the rear side of the right part of the storage lower part 1201 a, and the front side of the solenoid support part 1201 e and the right side of the storage lower 1201 a The game ball T is formed on the rear side of the lower housing portion 1201a at the center in the left-right direction and the support portion 1201f. And a, a passage hole 1201g that over can penetrate vertically.

  The lower housing portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the large winning opening 1154 and is inclined so that the bottom wall is lowered toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201 d is for rotatably supporting the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with the later-described bearing upper portions 1202 b of the attacker upper base 1202. The pivotal support portion 1201 f can pivotally support the link member 1205 by inserting the pivot shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 from the upper side. The passing hole 1201 g is received by the first start opening 1152 and the gaming ball T passing through the through hole 1202 e of the attacker upper base 1202 passes.

  The on-adjacent base 1202 of the on-hook unit 1200 is disposed on the left and right sides of the horizontally long box-like housing portion 1202a which is disposed leftward from the center in the left-right direction and whose front and lower portions are open. A pair of bearing upper parts 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c which is penetrated back and forth on the right side of the housing upper part 1202a and into which the pivot shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and formed on the upper rear side of the housing upper part 1202a It has a sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from the upper side, and a through hole 1202e through which the game ball T can pass vertically in the right portion in the sensor support portion 1202d. .

  The upper housing portion 1202 a of the attacker upper base 1202 cooperates with the lower housing portion 1201 a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a special winning opening 1154. The pair of bearing upper portions 1202 b is for supporting the winning opening opening / closing member 1203 rotatably in cooperation with the lower bearing portion 1201 d of the lower attacker base 1201. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a pivot shaft 1205a, which will be described later, of the link member 1205. The game ball T, which is received by the first start opening 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208, passes through the through hole 1202e.

  The big winning opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 has a flat door portion 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and a door portion 1203a And an action pin 1203c projecting rightward from a position at a lower rear position than the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side.

  The door portion 1203 a of the special winning opening / closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of closing the special winning opening 1154 formed by the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203 b are rotatably supported respectively on the lower bearing 1201 d and the lower bearing 1201 d and the upper bearing 1202 b of the upper attacker base 1202. The action pin 1203 c is inserted between a pair of actuation pins 1205 c described later of the link member 1205.

  The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 while being inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201 e of the lower attacker base 1201 so that the plunger 1204 a advances and retracts from the right end side. . The plunger 1204 a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disk-shaped tip. The adder solenoid 1204 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the biasing force of the coil spring causes the plunger 1204 a to project.

  The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a pivot shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b projecting rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the pivot shaft 1205a, and a pivot shaft 1205a. And a pair of operating pins 1205c that project forward from a position eccentric to the axis of the lens. The pivot shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the pivot support portion 1201 f of the lower attachment base 1201 and the axial hole 1202 c of the upper attachment base 1202. The engaging portion 1205 b is formed with a notch into which the disk-like tip of the plunger 1204 a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pins 1203c of the large winning opening / closing member 1203 are inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

  In the link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205b mainly moves in the left and right direction in a state where the relationship between the engagement portion 1205b and the pair of operation pins 1205c is attached to the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of operating pins 1205c are arranged to move mainly in the vertical direction. Then, the link member 1205 pivots in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the projecting state in the direction of retraction (left direction in front view).

  The guiding member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape with its upper and rear portions open, and is attached to the lower side of the through hole 1201 b in the lower attacker base 1201.

  In the normal state, the plunger 1204 a of the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment protrudes in the right direction by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operation pin 1205c of the pair of operation pins 1205c is in contact with the action pin 105c of the large winning opening / closing member 1203 from the upper side, and the flat door 1203a is erected. Large winning opening 1154 has been closed. That is, the game ball T can not be received with respect to the special winning opening 1154.

  When power is applied to the attachment solenoid 1204 by a big hit game or the like, the attachment unit 1200 moves in the left direction of the plunger 1204a and is in a state of being retracted except for the disk-like tip. By the leftward movement of the plunger 1204a, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-like tip of the plunger 1204a revolves to move in the left direction, and the link member 1205 is rotated. It rotates clockwise in a front view about the moving shaft 1205a.

  When the link member 1205 is rotated clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c is separated upward from the action pin 1203c of the big winning opening / closing member 1203. The lower operation pin 1205c abuts on the action pin 1203c from the lower side, and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is pivoted about the pivot pin 1203b so that the upper end thereof is moved forward, and the flat door portion 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the gaming ball T to the special winning opening 1154 can be received.

[2-2B. Variable start port unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 108 to 113 and the like, the variable starting opening unit 1210 of the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a second starting opening 1153 opened forward in the front right side in a front view. The second starting opening 1153 is formed in a size where only one game ball T can pass. The variable start port unit 1210 has a shallow box-like lower case 1211 open at the front and the upper, and a box-like upper case 1212 attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and having a part of the front and the lower open. A ball detection sensor 1213 attached to the lower case 1211 for detecting the game ball T received in the second start opening 1153, a start opening door member 1214 slidably supported back and forth by the lower case 1211, and the lower case A start port solenoid 1215 provided with a plunger 1215a supported between 1211 and an upper case 1212 and advancing and retracting according to the game state and transmission and reception of a plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 to transmit and receive the start port door member 1214 The slide position of the link member 1216 that slides to the A slide detection sensor 1217 that includes a.

  The lower case 1211 of the variable start opening unit 1210 is formed to be inclined downward from the front to the rear at the position of the right side of the upper surface, and a ball guiding portion 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T, A passage hole 1211b which penetrates up and down on the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and through which the game ball T can pass, and opens forward on the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and the ball detection sensor 1213 is inserted and supported Sensor support holes 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed at the center in the left-right direction and facing each other and extending longitudinally, and a cylindrical support pin 1211e projecting upward from the left side of the upper surface And.

  The upper case 1212 of the variable start port unit 1210 is open at the front on the right side in the front view and is open at the front and the lower, and the upper portion 1212a is inclined so that the upper wall becomes lower toward the rear. A second starting opening decoration is formed between the front end opening forming portion 1212 b forming the lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front view than the passage upper portion 1212 a in the case 1212 and the base plate 1160 formed on the upper side of the front end opening forming portion 1212 b A rear substrate holding portion 1212c for holding the substrate 1168 and the starting opening reflector 1169; a solenoid covering portion 1212d formed on the rear side of the rear substrate holding portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covering the starting opening solenoid 1215 from the upper side; Is equipped.

  The passage upper portion 1212 a of the upper case 1212 forms a second start port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211 a and the passage hole 1211 b in the lower case 1211. The passage upper portion 1212a is formed in a U-like shape with the opening directed downward, and a right side extending downward longer than the left side in a front view. Also, the passage upper part 1212a can guide the gaming ball T to the rear by cooperating with the ball guiding part 1211a.

  A front end of the front end opening forming portion 1212 b of the upper case 1212 is formed at the same position as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212 a in the front-rear direction. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212 b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) to the left from near the lower end of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a. It extends further to the left at a large angle (about 45 degrees) to the same height as the passage top 1212a, and further extends horizontally to the left from the top of the passage 1212a. It is formed in a shape extending downward to an intermediate height between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side of 1212a.

  In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape extending upward from near the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a and extending horizontally short from the upper end to the lower right It extends from the lower end of the left side of the passage top 1212a to about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and further lowers the right from there to near the lower end of the left side As it extends diagonally longer. The first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, the third guiding portion 1214c, and the like of the starting opening door member 1214 are disposed below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

  The start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 is a flat first guide 1214 a extending obliquely (at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction) toward the lower right of the front view, and a first guide A flat second guide portion 1214b which extends obliquely at an angle (about 5 degrees) smaller than the first guide portion 1214a from the right end of the right side 1214a to the lower right in front view, and the second guide portion 1214b A flat plate-like third guide portion 1214c which is provided at a position lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b on the right side than the right end and inclined downward toward the rear, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c The front wall 1214d extends to the same height as the right end of the second guide 1214b from the second guide 1214b, and the flat upright wall 12 extends upward from the right end of the third guide 1214c beyond the front wall 1214d. Includes a 4e, the.

  In addition, the start opening door member 1214 has a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guiding portion 1214b, a flat slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider A cylindrical connection pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g, and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g.

  The first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, the third guiding portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the starting opening door member 1214 have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width in the front-rear direction of the first guide portion 1214 a and the like is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T. In addition, the left and right length (length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) of the starting opening door member 1214 is about four times as long as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T It is done. Furthermore, the left and right length in plan view of the first guide portion 1214a is formed to be about 2/3 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T. The first guiding portion 1214 a and the second guiding portion 1214 b are disposed below the front end opening forming portion 1212 b of the upper case 1212. Further, the third guide portion 1214 c, the front wall portion 1214 d, and the standing wall portion 1214 e are disposed between the ball guiding portion 1211 a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212 a of the upper case 1212.

  The left and right ends of the slider portion 1214 g of the starting opening door member 1214 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211 d of the lower case 1211. As a result, the starting opening door member 1214 is slidably supported forward and backward by the pair of slide grooves 1211 d of the lower case 1211. The connection pin 1214 h is slidably inserted into a connection hole 1216 e of the link member 1216 to be described later, so that the connection pin 1214 h is connected to the link member 1216 to transmit and receive the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1215 a of the start port solenoid 1215. The detection unit 1214i can be detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  The start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid cover 1212 d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215 a advances and retracts from the left end side. The plunger 1215 a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. Further, the start port solenoid 1215 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the plunger 1215 a is in a projecting (extending) state by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1216 of the variable start port unit 1210 has a cylindrical main body 1216 a rotatably fitted on the support pin 1211 e of the lower case 1211 from the upper side, and a first piece 1216 b extending outward from the main body 1216 a And an engaging portion 1216c projecting upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and engageable with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215, and in the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. And a second piece 1216d extending longer than the first piece 1216b at a right angle, and extending in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extends through vertically at the tip of the second piece 1216d And a long hole-like connection hole 1216e into which the connection pin 1214h of the cage opening door member 1214 is slidably inserted from the lower side. There.

  The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends from the upper end of the main body 1216a in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216 d extends perpendicularly to the first piece 1216 b in a clockwise direction in plan view from below the first piece 1216 b in the main body 1216 a. The second piece 1216 d is formed to have a length such that its tip end is located near the center in the left-right direction of the lower case 1211 in a state in which the main body 1216 a is fitted into the support pin 1211 e of the lower case 1211.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable start port unit 1210 has a lower position than the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214. The start port solenoid 1215 is disposed laterally long on the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b above the slider portion 1214g, and the start port solenoid 1215 is further extended. At the lower side, the link member 1216 is used to transmit the advancing and retracting of the plunger 1215a to the starting opening door member 1214. As a result, the distance (size) of the variable start port unit 1210 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210 can be made relatively wide.

  In the variable start port unit 1210 of this embodiment, in a normal state (the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 protrudes leftward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the end of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and The connection hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d, which extends at right angles in the clockwise direction, is located rearward of the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the starting opening door member 1214 provided with the connection pin 1214 h inserted into the connection hole 1216 e of the link member 1216 substantially coincides with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the start-up opening door member 1214 is in a retracted state (in the non-acceptable position) from the inside of the game area 1100. In this normal state, the detection portion 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  The variable start port unit 1210 immerses the plunger 1215 a when the start port solenoid 1215 is energized according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball T passes by the gate member 1134 of the center character 1130. Move to (see Figure 113). When the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 moves rightward and retracts, the entire link member 1216 is seen in plan view centering on the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 by the engagement portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. It turns in the clockwise direction.

  By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the end of the second piece 1216d is moved so as to relatively move forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connection pin 1214h of the starting opening door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the start opening door member 1214 protrudes forward more than the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the start opening door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214 e appears in the game area 1100 (a state of an acceptable position). In a state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to appear in the game area 1100, the detecting portion 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a in the state where the start opening door member 1214 appears in the game area 1100, the game machine rolls to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b Sent up. Then, the gaming ball T sent to the second guiding portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guiding portion 1214b, and to the third guiding portion 1214c disposed on the right side of the second guiding portion 1214b. Will be sent.

  Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined to lower the rear end, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes its rolling direction in the third guide portion 1214c to the rear, From the rear end of the third guiding portion 1214c, it is sent between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 from the rear. That is, the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153. At this time, in the starting opening door member 1214, a standing wall portion 1214e having a height about half the outer diameter of the gaming ball T is provided at the right end of the third guiding portion 1214c. The game ball T rolled from the left direction to the third guiding portion 1214c abuts against the standing wall portion 1214e, and is prevented from rolling to the right than the third guiding portion 1214c. In addition, the game ball T rolled from the left direction to the third guiding portion 1214c can also be rolled backward by the guiding piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  The gaming ball T discharged rearward from the third guiding portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 disposed below the third guiding portion 1214c, and is guided to the ball guiding portion 1211a. Then, the ball enters the passage hole 1211 b opened at the rear end of the ball guiding portion 1211 a, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second starting opening guide member 1170.

[2-2 C. Schematic Configuration of Feature Unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the winning opening unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. The character unit 1220 has a character winning opening 1155 that can be received by the game ball T according to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball T to the first start port 1152 and the second start port 1153. The game ball T accepted by the character prize opening unit 1220A of the character prize opening unit 1220A and the character prize opening 1155 of the character prize opening unit 1220A is made available for distribution, and provided with the V prize opening 1156 capable of receiving the game ball T by sorting And a V winning opening unit 1220B.

[2-2C1. Prize winning hole unit]
The prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize unit 1220 supports the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 for opening / closing the prize winning opening 1155 and the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 slidably in the front-rear direction and the prize winning for prize Upper housing 1222 which divides left and right ends of mouth 1155, lower housing 1223 which is attached to the lower side of upper housing 1222 and receives gaming balls T received in prize winning opening 1155, and lower housing 1223 It has a prize winning opening sensor 1224 for detecting the game ball T received by the prize winning opening 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and advancing and retracting according to the gaming state The prize winning solenoid 1225 and the plunger 1225 a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 It has a link member 1226 for transmitting the withdrawal and sliding the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221, and an open / close detection sensor 1227 for detecting the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 1155 by detecting the movement of the link member 1226. .

  The prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is a flat door part 1221a which extends in the longitudinal direction with a constant width and is inclined so that the left side in the front view is low, An extending piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end in the left-right direction center of 1221a, and a connecting hole 1221c penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 1221b and extending laterally .

  The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A has a box shaped upper housing main body 1222a with the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 placed on the upper surface and the lower side opened, and the front from the left and right ends of the front end of the upper housing main 1222a A pair of flat plate-like partition pieces 1222b protruding to the top and bottom and front and back, and formed on the left and right ends of the upper front of the upper housing main body 1222a, the door 1221a left and right ends of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 A pair of groove-shaped first supports 1222c slidably supporting the opening 1222d, and an opening 1222d vertically extending through the upper housing main body 1222a between the pair of first supports 1222c; An extension piece formed on the upper rear portion of the upper housing main body 1222a and used for the prize product opening / closing member 1221 A groove-shaped pair of second support portion 1222e of the left and right ends of 221b slidably supported, and a. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b coincide with each other.

  The lower housing 1223 of the prize product winning opening unit 1220A is in the form of a box whose upper side is open and extends left and right in the front housing of the upper housing body 1222a of the upper housing 1222 with the same length as the distance between the pair of partition pieces 1222b. The ball receiving part 1223a which becomes lower toward the left and lowers backward near the left end, the notch part 1223b formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving part 1223a and through which the game ball T can pass, and the notch part 1223b Sensor support part 1223c which is formed on the rear side and lower side and has a shallow box shape opened on the upper side and into which the prize winning hole sensor 1224 is fitted, and vertically penetrating at the bottom wall of the sensor support part 1223c It is formed on the right rear side of the discharge port 1223d through which the game ball detected by the winning opening sensor 1224 can pass and the ball receiving portion 1223a. And a link member 1226 which is formed on the left side of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e (the central rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a) of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e. And a link accommodating portion 1223 f rotatably accommodated.

  The prize winning solenoid 1225 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a moves forward and backward from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. The prize winning solenoid 1225 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and in a non-energized state, the plunger 1225a is in a projecting (extending) state by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1226 of the prize product winning opening unit 1220A is pivotally supported at the bottom of the link accommodating portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends left and right, and the upper housing 1222 from the pivot shaft 1226a. A band plate-like flange 1226b extending to the upper side of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a through the opening 1222d and a columnar extending to the left and right at the upper end of the flange 1226b A connecting portion 1226c inserted from the lower side into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 and a tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 that protrudes rightward at a lower position from the upper and lower centers of the collar 1226b Between the engaging portion 1226d, and the engaging portion 1226d of the collar 1226b, and the pivot shaft 1226a. And a, a detection piece 1226e detected by and close detection sensor 1227 extends to put al rearward.

  In the prize product winning opening unit 1220A of this embodiment, the plunger 1225a of the prize product solenoid 1225 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of the coil spring in a normal state (during non-energization), and the tip of the plunger 1225a The hook portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is in a state of being erected substantially vertically from the pivot shaft portion 1226a by the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 engaged therewith. In this state, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 provided with the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pressed forward by the connecting portion 1226c through the connecting hole 1221c. As a result, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides forward.

  Thereby, the door portion 1221a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 protrudes forward more than the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a of the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end It is in position. Further, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b which are separated to the left and right of the upper housing 1222. Therefore, the prize winning opening 1155 opened upward is closed by the door 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, and the game ball T can not be received (FIG. 124 (b ) Etc.). In this state, the game ball T which has flowed down on the door 1221a rolls leftward according to the door 1221a inclined so that the left side becomes lower and is discharged leftward from the left end of the door 1221a Ru. In the state where the prize winning opening 1155 is closed by the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is in a state of being detected by the open / close detection sensor 1227.

  When the prize winning solenoid unit 1220 is energized in accordance with the special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball T in the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153, the prize winning opening unit 1220A is a plunger 1225a. Move backward to immerse. As the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move rearward. As a result, the link member 1226 pivots about the pivot shaft portion 1226 a in such a direction that the upper end of the collar 1226 b moves rearward. And since the connection part 1226c of the upper end of the collar part 1226b will move back, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 will slide back via the connection hole 1221c in which the connection part 1226c is inserted. .

  At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip end of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has a length (height) of the flange portion 1226b extending from the pivot shaft portion 1226a. The connection portion 1226c at the upper end of the collar portion 1226b is largely moved rearward with respect to the amount of movement of the plunger 1225a to the rear because the rotation shaft portion 1226a is disposed rather than the center. Therefore, the front end of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear end of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the prize winning opening 1155 It is opened upward to be able to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In the state where the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the open / close detection sensor 1227.

  When the game ball T is received by the prize winning opening 1155 while the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is retreated and the prize winning opening 1155 is opened to be acceptable, the gaming ball T is It flows down between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223 and rolls left on the ball receiving portion 1223a by the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. The lower housing is detected by the prize winning hole sensor 1224 which is discharged rearward from the notch 1223b on the left end rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a and supported on the lower side behind the notch 1223b. It is discharged onto the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, which will be described later, of the lower V pay-port unit 1220B from the discharge port 1223d of 1223.

[2-2C 2. V winning opening unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the prize unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the prize winning opening unit 1220A, and a unit front base 1230 in which a V prize opening 1156 is formed, and a unit front base 1230 Unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side of the unit, a V prize solenoid 1232 having a plunger 1232a held between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and advancing and retracting in accordance with the gaming state, and the unit rear base 1231 Drive gear member 1233 rotatably supported by unit front base 1230 on the rear side and rotated by advancing and retracting plunger 1232a of V prize solenoid 1232; driven gear member 1234 meshing with drive gear member 1233; driven gear member 1234 The back end is attached to the center of the Front while being rotatably supported by and unit before the base 1230 is provided with a shaft member 1235 which projects forward from the unit before the base 1230.

  In addition, the V winning opening unit 1220B is disposed on the front of the unit front base 1230 and attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a that can receive only one game ball T on the circumferential surface. It is attached to the front of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, the disk-like rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front of the rotating body 1236, and the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 And a ball guiding member 1238 for guiding the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223 d of the mouth unit 1220 A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guiding the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning hole 1156. .

  Further, the V prize opening unit 1220 B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230 and has a pair of V prize opening sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received by the V prize opening 1156 and the unit front base 1230 behind A V loss sensor 1240 for detecting the game ball T not attached to the V prize opening 1156 after being attached to the side and accepted by the prize winning opening 1155, and attached to the rear side of the unit rear base 1231 to rotate And a rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the body 1236.

  The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and a front portion 1230a and a central portion of the front portion 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b for rotatably supporting the shaft member 1235, and a hole 1230c for penetrating the game ball T on the upper side of the bearing hole 1230b. .

  In addition, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a, and guides the game ball T received the V winning hole 1156i downward and the first discharge path 1230d whose rear side is opened, and the front surface portion 1230a It is formed on the upper side of the first discharge path 1230d by the second discharge path 1230e, which is formed on the rear surface and guides the gaming ball T passing through the missing hole 1230c downward and the rear side is opened, and the rear surface of the front portion 1230a And a solenoid accommodating portion 1230 f in which the cage V prize solenoid 1232 is accommodated. A pair of V winning hole sensors 1239 are attached in the first discharge path 1230 d. Further, a V loss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge passage 1230 e. The open rear sides of the first discharge path 1230 d, the second discharge path 1230 e, and the solenoid accommodating portion 1230 f are closed by the unit rear base 1231.

  The V prize solenoid 1232 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 such that the plunger 1232a advances and retracts from the lower end side. The plunger 1232 a of the V prize solenoid 1232 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at its tip. Further, the V prize solenoid 1232 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232 a in a protruding direction, and the plunger 12 32 a is in a state of protruding downward when not energized by the coil spring.

  The drive gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220 B extends in the front-rear direction, and has a shaft 1233 a rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a flat plate extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the shaft 1233 a. An extension piece 1233b, a drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and a front end of the extension piece 1233b And an engaging portion 1233 d engaged with the tip end of the plunger 1232 a of the solenoid 1232.

  The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and engages with the driven gear of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a. And a detection piece 1234b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a. The arc-shaped driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 has a pitch diameter that is about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the arc-shaped driving gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233. There is.

  The rotary body 1236 of the V prize winning opening unit 1220B is formed in a state in which a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T is opened forward and outward. In the front view, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 extends in the direction in which two sides (two sides separated in the circumferential direction) from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side move away from each other as it goes to the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a in a front view on the left side. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of the rotary body 1236 is formed to be about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T.

  Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed so that the outer diameter from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the gaming ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In the receiving portion 1236a, the rear wall is cut away from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side, and is formed lower than two sides separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a is provided with an inclined portion 1236b on the front side (inner side) of the rear wall, which is inclined obliquely backward as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis), The game balls T flowing down from above contact the inclined portions 1236b, thereby guiding the game balls T forward and making it easy to receive them into the receiving portion 1236a, and when receiving the game balls T, the receiving portion 1236a The impact that acts on the bottom of can be mitigated. Further, the open front end side of the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Thus, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can make the game ball T enter and leave only from the radially outer side of the rotating body 1236.

  The ball guiding member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting off the cylindrical peripheral wall 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and the upper portion of the peripheral wall 1238a, and an upper opening through which the game ball T can pass The right side opening 1238c is formed by cutting out the right side portion 1238b and the right side portion (a position at an angle of 90 degrees clockwise with respect to the upper opening 1238b) of the peripheral wall 1238a. A ball inlet 1238d disposed immediately below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the prize winning hole unit 1220A above the peripheral wall 1238a and opening upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d to the top opening 1238b An upper guiding portion 1238e which is lowered in a crank shape and bent like a crank so that the game ball T can be distributed, and a right opening 123 Front view lower right V game ball T has become lower toward the winning opening 1156 is provided with a right guiding section 1238f allowing flow c. From

  The rear end sides of the upper guiding portion 1238 e and the right guiding portion 1238 f are open in the ball guiding member 1238, and the ball guiding member 1238 is attached to the unit front base 1230 to close the rear end side opened by the front portion 1230 a.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is rotatably supported at a position near the right end in the front view on the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly above the vertical center. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached at a position slightly left from the center in the front view in the unit front base 1230. The drive gear 1233 c of the drive gear member 1233 is engaged with the driven gear 1234 a of the driven gear member 1234 between the shaft portion 1233 a of the drive gear member 1233 and the shaft member 1235, and the V prize solenoid 1232 is disposed. It is done.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B, a V winning opening 1156 opens forward at a position directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 below the center of the rotating body 1236.

  Energization / non-energization of the V prize solenoid 1232 is performed in a constant cycle by the control of the main control board 1113. When the V-payout solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232 a is protruded downward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233 d of the drive gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232 a which protrudes downward, and the drive gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft portion 1233 a, In the vicinity of the end in the clockwise direction in the front view of the gear 1233c, it meshes with the vicinity of the end in the counterclockwise direction of the driven gear 1234a in the driven gear member 1234 (see FIG. 120B). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 extends upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is in the state detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

  The rotating member 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 by the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 at the rear end faces the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right in front view It is in the state of the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the right opening 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a erected state. The upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

  Thus, when the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f. The game ball T received in the V winning hole 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230 d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230 and is detected by the pair of V pay hole sensors 1239, and the first discharge path 1230 d It is discharged downward from the lower end of the

  On the other hand, the gaming ball T which is received by the prize winning opening 1155 of the prize winning opening unit 120 B and reaches the upper mouth 1238 b through the ball inlet 1238 d and the upper guiding portion 1238 e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a block the reception to the receiving portion 1236a, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 which is inclined so that the rear end side is narrowed opens at the rear side of the lower portion of the upper guiding portion 1238e While entering the missing hole 1230c of the front portion 1230a of the unit front base 1230 and being guided downward by the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, it is detected by the V loss sensor 1240, and the second discharge path 1230e It is discharged downward from the lower end of the

  In a state where the V-payout solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232 a is raised to be immersed against the biasing force of the coil spring. When the plunger 1232a is raised, the drive gear member 1233 is rotated clockwise in a front view centering on the shaft portion 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. When the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the entire driven gear member 1234 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the shaft member 1235 by the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 engaged with the drive gear 1233c. Rotate. Thus, the rotating body 1236 mounted on the front end side of the shaft member 1235 is also turned 90 degrees counterclockwise in a front view through the shaft member 1235 whose rear end side is mounted on the driven gear member 1234. Become.

  Then, when the rotating body 1236 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the receiving portion 1236 a is opened upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236 a coincides with the upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. As a result, the receiving portion 1236a is in communication with the upper guiding portion 1238e through the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120 (a)).

  With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 directed upward, when the gaming ball is discharged from the prize winning opening unit 1220A side and enters the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, it passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and the upper portion It is received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 from the port 1238 b. When the game ball enters the ball inlet 138b with the game ball T being received by the receiver 1236a of the rotor 1236, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guide 1238e and receives the rotor 1236. It comes in contact with the game ball T received by the part 1236a from above, enters into the backward hole 1230c, and is discharged downward through the second discharge part 130e of the unit front base 1230. Ru.

  At this time, the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a and does not come off from the receiving portion 1236a even if the gaming ball T abuts from above . The center of the upper opening 1238b (the center of the upper guiding portion 1238e in the front-rear direction) is formed slightly behind the center of the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Because, by this, another game ball T coming from behind comes in contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a, so another one that has been in contact from above The gaming ball T can be guided to the rear with the lost hole 1230c, and another gaming ball T, which comes later, can be reliably discharged downward from the lost hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

[3-1. Game content]
The game contents using the gaming ball T in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 121 to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player operates the handle device 500 to drive the game balls T stored in the plate unit 300 one by one into the upper part of the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can. The game balls T driven into the game area 1100 flow down so as to pass either the left or right of the center character 1130, and are discharged from the out port 1112 a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails G, a windmill, a decoration including a center character 1130, and the like are arranged, and the game ball T contacts the obstacle nail G or the like to suppress its flow-down speed. At the same time, the player can be moved in various directions, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T.

  In addition, when game ball T is accepted in general winning opening 1151, first starting opening 1152, second starting opening 1153, large winning opening 1154, prize winning opening 1155, etc. arranged in gaming area 1100, it is accepted. The game balls T of the number corresponding to the winning opening are paid out to the dish unit 300. The game balls T discharged from the out port 1112a, the general winning port 1151, the first starting port 1152, the second starting port 1153, the special winning port 1154 and the prize winning port 1155 are not returned to the player.

  When the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows downward from the top of the center character 1130 in the left direction, it flows between the center character 1130 and the induction wall 1111 c in the game area 1100. Become. At this time, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 opened in the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center character 1130, the game is played again from the warp exit 1132 opened in the lower center of the center article 1130 in the left-right direction. It is released into region 1100. The first starting opening 1152 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward directly under the warp outlet 1132, and the gaming ball T released from the warp outlet 1132 has an extremely high probability of the first starting aperture. Accepted by 1152.

  In addition, even if the game ball T flowing down the left side of the center character 1130 does not enter the warp entrance 1131, a plurality of obstacle nails G lower the center character 1130 to the center side in the horizontal direction of the game area 1100. Because it is close, it may be accepted by the first starting port 1152.

  Then, when the gaming ball T is received in the first starting opening 1152, the gaming ball T is detected by the first starting opening sensor 1190, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 in response to a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 1190, and the payout control board 1101 controls the winning ball device 740 to respond to the payout command received. The game balls T of the same number (for example, three) are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game balls T that flow down the left side of the center character 1130 and are not accepted by the first starting opening 1152 are discharged from the out port 1112 a at the lower end of the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows downward from the top of the center character 1130, the game ball T enters the right channel 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center character 1130, and the game area It is released into the game area 1100 from an outlet 1133 e disposed substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the 1100. Below the outlet 1133e, a general winning opening 1151 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward.

  Then, when the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 in response to a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 1101 controls the winning ball device 740 to respond to the payout command received. A number (for example, 10) of game balls T are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T which has flowed down the right side of the center character 1130 and has not been received by the general winning opening 1151 plays a role through the left or right of the receiving portion 1161 b of the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door 1221 a of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 closing the prize winning opening 1155 of the thing unit 1220. And game ball T which flowed down on the upper surface of the door 1221a rolls the upper surface of the door 1221a to the left under the prize winning opening upper sky wall 1161f, and from the left end of the door 1221a, the prize winning opening It rolls on the upper surface of the left shelf 1161 g and is discharged from the left end of the left winning combination prize shelf 1161 g to the lower left.

  Then, the game balls T released from the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g flow down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and roll the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j to the left, It is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the lower left. The game ball T released from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j abuts on the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m on the left side thereof, and downward along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m Flow down. The game ball T, which has flowed down along the right side of the second start opening area left upright wall portion 1161m, flows down onto the second start opening area lower shelf 1161i, and the upper surface of the second start opening area lower shelf 1161i is leftward. After rolling to the left side, it is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening lower shelf 1161i to the lower left so as to pass through the front of the large winning opening 1154.

  When the game ball T flows down the right side of the center character 1130, in the right channel 1133 of the center character 1130, the game ball T forms the gate member 1134 disposed in the gate space 1133c below the entrance path 1133b. When passing, it is detected by the gate sensor 1135 provided on the gate member 1134. Then, when passage of the game ball T is detected by the gate sensor 1135, the main control board 1113 acquires an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result, collates the acquired ordinary random number with the ordinary symbol table, and the acquired ordinary random number hits It is determined whether or not. At this time, after the normal symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114, the result of the normal lottery is displayed. After that, when the normal lottery is hit ("normal hit"), the starting port solenoid 1215 of the variable starting port unit 1210 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, for 0.3 seconds to 10 seconds). In the lottery of the normal lottery result, the probability that the “normal hit” is drawn is set to be higher than 1/2 (for example, 49/50 to 299/300).

  When the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized, the starting opening door member 1214 moves forward and passes through the second starting opening opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160 to form the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b, The third guide portion 1214 c, the front wall portion 1214 d, and the standing wall portion 1214 e protrude more forward than the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is released to the left from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, the second starting opening region abuts on the left standing wall portion 1161m and then the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214 It abuts on the portion 1214a, and the flow direction is directed to the right by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the gaming ball T rolls from the first guiding portion 1214a to the third guiding portion 1214c through the second guiding portion 1214b, and the inclination of the third guiding portion 1214c and the guiding piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 Thus, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second start port 1153 that is open rearward.

  When the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 according to the detection signal, and the payout control board At 1101, the number of (for example, one) gaming balls T are paid out to the dish unit 300 according to the received payout command by controlling the winning ball device 740.

  The periphery of the second starting port 1153 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 121 to FIG. 123 etc., the second starting opening 1153 is opened forward in a size that only one gaming ball T can receive. The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j of the front flow passage forming member 1161 is disposed immediately above the second starting opening 1153. The second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j extends left and right so that the left end is lower by about 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the higher right end is the second starting opening It is placed directly above 1153. That is, the left end side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j extends to the left side relative to the second starting opening 1153. In the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, the difference in height between the right end and the left end is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  A second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m is disposed on the left outside from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j with an interval slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T and extending vertically. The upper end of the second start opening area left erected wall portion 1161m is located about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball T above the upper end of the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, and the lower end is the second start opening The upper end of the upper shelf 1161 j extends vertically above the left end of the first guiding portion 1214 a of the starting opening door member 1214 at a distance approximately the same distance as the outer diameter of the gaming ball T than the upper left end of the upper shelf 1161 j.

  The starting opening door member 1214 is a right side of the second starting opening area left erected wall portion 1161m, and an opening at which only one game ball T can flow is opened between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and the second starting opening It is disposed below the upper shelf portion 1161 j. The length from the left end of the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 to the right end of the third guiding portion 1214c (the standing wall portion 1214e) is approximately four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T.

  The second starting opening 1153 is always open forward in the game area 1100. That is, the game ball T can be accepted regardless of the gaming state in appearance. However, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed above the second starting opening 1153, the game ball T can not be received by the second starting opening 1153 even if the gaming ball T flows downward from the upper side. On the other hand, if the game ball T dropped to the second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i disposed below the second starting opening 1153 jumps up to the height of the second starting opening 1153, the second starting opening 1153 Although it may be acceptable, in practice it is hardly accepted. That is, the second starting opening 1153 is arranged in the area where the game balls T are difficult to circulate in the game area 1100.

  As described above, the game machine ball T can be received from the front surface of the base plate 1160 by projecting the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 forward to the second starting opening 1153. Since the starting opening door member 1214 moves back and forth, it is difficult to determine whether the starting opening door member 1214 is moving forward or backward when viewed from the player (front side). Therefore, the starting opening door member depends on whether or not the game ball T is actually caused to flow down between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m depending on whether or not the starting opening door member 1214 abuts. The player must recognize the advance and withdrawal of 1214, and perform a right strike so that the game ball T circulates between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m to the player. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T, and to allow the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball T and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Then, in the normal state (the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 123 (a) etc., the front end of the start port door member 1214 does not project forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 1160. It has become. Therefore, in this state, even if the game ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left upright wall 1161 m, it does not contact the starting opening door member 1214, and the lower side The second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i disposed in

  Then, when the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized according to the result of the normal drawing which is drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134, the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 is more forward than the front surface of the base plate 1160 It will protrude to the

  The second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second start opening area left standing wall portion in a state where the front end of the start opening door member 1214 protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the bed plate 1160 (the second start opening 1153 can be received) When the gaming ball T flows down to between 1161 m, it abuts on the upper surface of the first guiding portion 1214 a. Since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side is high, the game ball T is guided to the right by this inclination. By the way, since the distance between the starting opening door member 1214 and the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the left side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is left The game ball T which is rolled to the left and is in contact with the second start opening area left upright wall portion 1161 m from the left end of the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and then is guided in the right direction by contacting the first guide portion 1214 a The motion of the player is a motion of making a U-turn rapidly, which can strongly attract the player's attention (see FIG. 122 (b) and FIG. 123 (b)).

  Then, the gaming ball T guided to the right by the first guiding part 1214a rolls on the second guiding part 1214b on the right side. Since the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the increase in the rolling speed of the game balls T is delayed. The gaming ball T, which has rolled the second guiding portion 1214b to the right, rolls to the third guiding portion 1214c on the right side. In the third guiding portion 1214c, a bottom surface is lowered rearward, and on the third guiding portion 1214c, a guiding piece 1161l protruding leftwardly from the right side of the third guiding portion 1214c toward the front is provided. It exists and the gaming ball T is guided to the rear and is received by the second starting opening 1153 opened to the rear side.

  In addition, since the front plate portion 1161a of the front flow passage forming member 1161 is present on the front side of the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 that protrudes forward than the front surface of the bed plate 1160, the game ball T is moved forward It does not fall off (see Figure 113 etc.).

  When energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a which has been retracted is protruded by the biasing force of the coil spring provided in the starting opening solenoid 1215, and the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted via the link member 1216. By the retraction of the starting opening door member 1214, the amount of projection of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the like protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases and the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 The clearance between the front flow passage forming member 1161 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a gradually increases.

  When the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, the game ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m or the first guiding portion 1214 a or When the game ball T is rolling on the second guide portion 1214b, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, etc. gradually decreases, so the game ball T rolling to the right side Before it reaches the third guiding portion 1214c, it does not fall downward from the gap between the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 and the front plate portion 1161a and is not received by the second starting opening 1153 (FIG. see c)).

  As a result, when energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is finished, the reception of the gaming ball T to the second starting opening 1153 can be immediately disabled, and therefore extra receiving of the gaming ball T is reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. On the other hand, for the player, since the game ball T falls from the middle of the starting opening door member 1214, anticipation is given to an opportunity when the second starting opening 1153 can be accepted next. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-2. Game state]
Next, the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is mainly controlled to a gaming state of any of the “normal gaming state”, the “time saving gaming state”, and the “big hit gaming state”.

  In the “normal game state”, the first special symbol determination (the special lottery described above is performed when the game ball T fired to the left area of the game area 1100 is accepted by the first start port 1152 by the player hitting left. ) Is performed, and a game is executed in which the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114 is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, since the lottery value determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol determination is defined as “1”, and the lottery value determined as the loss is defined as “199”, It will be a big hit with a probability of 1/200. When it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol determination, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and a big hit game described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol determination, it is 10% of the chance to "sudden short time no balls out 1 big hit" and 40% of the time is "short time with missing balls 1 kind It becomes a big hit, and with a 50% probability it will be a "one kind big hit" with no time saving.

  Here, “Suddenly short time no popping type 1 jackpot” is a type 1 jackpot in which the gaming state is set to the short time gaming state after a predetermined number of round games for opening the large winning opening 1154 for a short time. The “time saving dropout type 1 type big hit” is a type 1 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the time saving game state after a big hit game in which a round game of opening the big winning opening 1154 for a long time is performed a predetermined number of times. The “time saving no withdrawal ball type 1 jackpot” is a type 1 jackpot in which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after a jackpot game in which a round game of opening the large winning opening 1154 for a long time is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the "time saving game state", when the game ball T fired to the right area of the game area 1100 by the player performing a right strike passes the gate member 1134, a normal symbol determination (the above-mentioned normal lottery) is performed. In the "time saving game state", the normal symbol determination is performed, and when it becomes the above-described normal hit, the second starting opening 1153 is opened and the game ball T can be accepted.

  When the gaming ball T is received in the second start port 1153 while the gaming state is controlled to the “time saving gaming state”, the second special symbol determination is performed, and the special symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114 The game in which the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed later is executed.

  When the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "big hit" (one kind big hit), it becomes "one kind of big hit with time-out with falling time" with a probability of 70% and "one with time-less falling out with a probability of 30%" It becomes a big hit.

  Here, "time saving with withdrawal balls type 1 big hit" is that the game state is set to the time saving game state after the big hit game which is performed a predetermined number of round games to open the large winning opening 1154 for a long time is performed 1 It is a big hit. "Time saving no type ball with type 1 big hit" is a type 1 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after a big hit game in which a round game of opening the large winning opening 1154 for a long time is performed a predetermined number of times . As described above, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", the gaming state is set to the time saving game state or the normal gaming state after the big hit game is performed without the small hit game being performed. .

  In the “time saving game state”, when it is determined that the small hit is made by the second special symbol determination, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and the prize winning opening 1155 is temporarily opened. Then, when the game ball T is received from the prize winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a during the small hitting game, the gaming ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156, and the two types of big hit become small hit following the small hit game. A big hit game is executed.

  Specifically, the game ball T can be received from the prize winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236 a by sliding the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 when it becomes a small hit. The game ball T received by the receiving portion 1246a is received by the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b) Two kinds of big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lottery value determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol determination is defined as "1", and the lottery value determined to be a small hit is defined as "198". The lottery value determined to be a loss is set to “1”. As described above, most of the determination results of the second special symbol determination executed under the condition that the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153 is a small hit, so it is easy to be a big hit of two types.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball T is received in the V winning hole 1156 during the small hit game, it has a probability of 70% “time hit with 2 balls and a big hit” and a probability of 30% “time reduction” There are two types of big hit with no balls (see FIG. 126). Here, “time saving type with 2 types of big hit” is a 2 type big hit where the gaming state is set to the time saving gaming state after the big hit game is executed. On the other hand, “time saving no 2 balls with 2 types of big hit” is a 2 type big hit where the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is executed.

  The “big hit gaming state” is a playing state executed when the big hit symbol indicating that the big hit is displayed on the function indicator 1114 is stopped, that is, the above-described type 1 big hit, and a big winning A game to open the mouth 1154 is executed.

  In addition, during the small hit game described above, the V winning opening 1156 is temporarily opened, and during this time, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 and a two-type big hit occurs. And also in this case, a game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened as a big hit game is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit game is performed by the game ball T being received by the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the game state is the time-saving game state or the normal game at the end of the big hit game according to the type of small hit. Set to state.

  Then, in the "time saving game state", if no big hit occurs even if the second special symbol determination is made 100 times, the gaming state is returned from the "time saving game state" to the "normal game state" Become. It should be noted that the gaming state may be returned to the “normal gaming state” when no big hit occurs even if the first special symbol determination is made 100 times. Also, the game may be returned to the "normal gaming state" when no big hit occurs even if the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is made 100 times.

[4. Processing by main control board]
Next, processing by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 141. FIG. The processing by the main control board 1113 proceeds along the processing procedure on the control program executed during the game.

[4-1. Timer interrupt processing by main control board]
First, with reference to FIG. 127, the timer interrupt process executed in main control board 1113 will be described in detail. The main control board 1113 repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing at regular time intervals during normal operation excluding power-on, power-off, and the like.

  First, the main control board 1113 executes random number update processing to update various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1) .

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot, a jackpot, or a loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (see FIG. 126) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hit design random number is a random number for determining the type of the two types of big hit (see FIG. 126) generated when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game.

  Further, the reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to render with reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether to open the second starting opening 1153 or not.

  Next, when a detection signal from each sensor is input, the main control board 1113 executes a detection process (step S2). This detection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes special symbol determination, and after displaying the special symbol on the function display 1114 in a variable manner, the special symbol processing including processing to stop and display the determination symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination Execute (step S3). This special symbol process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes normal symbol determination, and after normal symbol display is variably displayed on the function display 1114, normal symbol processing including processing for stopping and displaying an ordinary symbol indicating the result of normal symbol determination, etc. Execute (step S4). This normal symbol process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 slides the starting opening door member 1214 to receive the game ball T in the second starting opening 1153 when it is determined that the second starting opening 1153 is opened as a result of normal symbol determination. The start-up opening door processing to be enabled is executed (step S5). The starting opening door process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that it is a small hit in the special symbol processing in step S3, it slides the role winning hole opening and closing member 1221 to temporarily open the role winning hole 1155, When game ball T is received from prize winning opening 1155 to receiving portion 1236a, opening rotation control processing is executed to enable game ball T to be received in V winning opening 1156 by rotating rotating body 1236 (step S6). The release rotation control means will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that a big hit is made in step S3, or when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hitting game, the big winning opening 1154 is opened. The mouth opening control process is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes a winning ball process for controlling the payout of the winning balls according to the winning of the gaming ball T (step S8).

  Then, the main control board 1113 has peripheral information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM of the main control board 1113, not shown) in the processing steps prior to step S8. The transmission processing to be transmitted to the control board 1116 is executed (step S9).

[4-2. Detection process by main control board]
Next, detection processing in step S2 of FIG. 127 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first monitors the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the first starting opening sensor 1190, and updates various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, reach random number, and the like) appropriately updated by the processing of step S1. And the variation pattern random number), the first starting opening detection process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 1190 is input (step S21). The first starting opening detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 1191, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit random number, small hit, small hit) appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The second starting opening detection process is executed to obtain the value at the time when the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 1191 is input for the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number) (step S22). The second starting opening detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135, and at the time when the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is input for the normal symbol random number appropriately updated by the processing of step S1. The gate detection process for acquiring the value of is executed (step S23). This gate detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[4-3. First start opening detection process by main control board]
Next, the first starting opening detection process in step S21 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, to the main control board 1113, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 1190 (a signal indicating that the gaming ball T has been received in the first starting opening 1152) is input following the random number updating process of step S1. Whether or not the first starting opening sensor 1190 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T is determined based on whether or not it is (step S211).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the first starting opening sensor 1190 detects the reception of the game ball T (step S211: YES), the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 It is determined whether or not the number of pending of is less than the maximum number of pendings of first special symbol determination stored in advance in the storage area (ROM of main control board 1113, not shown) (step S212).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holdings is less than the maximum number of holdings 4 (step S212: YES), the main control board 1113 adds “1” to the value of the number of holdings (step S213).

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the first starting opening sensor 1190 does not detect the reception of the game ball T (step S211: NO), it determines that the number of reservations is the maximum number of reservations four. (Step S212: NO), complete the first starting opening detection process.

  Next, the main control board 1113 acquires a big hit random number as acquisition information to be used for the first special symbol determination (step S214), acquires a big hit symbol random number (step S215), and obtains a reach random number (step S216), The fluctuation pattern random number is acquired (step S 217), and the acquired random number is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

  Then, the main control board 1113 sets a hold command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is held in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S218). The hold command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When setting the hold command, the main control board 113 ends the first starting opening detection process.

[4-4. Second start port detection process by main control board]
Next, the second starting opening detection processing in step S22 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 performs a second start based on whether or not a detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been received in the second start port 1153) is input. It is determined whether the mouth sensor 1191 has detected acceptance of the gaming ball T (step S221).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the second starting opening sensor 1191 detects the reception of the game ball T (step S221: YES), the big hit gaming flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is " Based on whether or not it is set to "ON", it is determined whether or not a big hit game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened (step S222). The big hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the big hit game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the big hit game.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game is not in progress (step S222: NO), whether the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" or not It is determined whether or not the small hit game of opening the combination prize winning opening 1155 is in progress based on (step S223). This small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game to open the prize winning opening 1155 is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the small hit game, and the small hit game is ended. Sometimes set to "OFF".

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not in progress (step S223: NO), it determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step S224). Here, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not (step S224: NO), the jackpot random number is acquired (step S225), the jackpot random number is acquired (step S226), and the symbol for small hit The random number is acquired (step S227), the reach random number is acquired (step S228), and the variation pattern random number is acquired (step S229). When the main control board 113 acquires these random numbers, it ends the second starting opening detection process.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S227, an opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the prize winning opening 1155 is determined by sliding the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 based on the small hit design random number. The determined open / close pattern is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 together with the small hit design random number, and is further transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 in the transmission process of step S9.

  In addition, when it is determined that the second start port sensor 1191 does not detect acceptance of the game ball T (step S221: NO), and when it is determined that a big hit game is in progress (step S222: YES), a small hit game is in progress. When it is determined that (step S223: YES), and when it is determined that the special symbol is changing (step S224: YES), the second starting opening detection process is ended.

[4-5. Gate detection process by main control board]
Next, the gate detection processing in step S23 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in the main control board 1118, the gate sensor 1135 passes the game ball T based on whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has passed through the gate member 1134) is input. Is determined (step S231).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 detects the passage of the game ball T (step S 231: YES), the number of reserved normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations is less than 4 (step S232).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holdings is less than the maximum number of holdings 4 (step S232: YES), “1” is added to the value of the number of holdings (step S233). Then, the normal symbol random number used for the normal symbol determination held is acquired and stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S234). The main control board 113 ends the gate detection process when acquiring the normal symbol random number.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 has not detected passage of the game ball T (step S231: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the maximum number of reservations is four. (Step S232: NO), the gate detection process is ended.

[4-6. Special symbol processing by main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol processing performed by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail. The main control board 1113 is initially in the big hit game or the small hit game based on whether the big hit game flag or the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON”. It is determined whether or not (step S301).

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is in the big hit game or the small hit game (step S301: YES), while the special symbol processing is ended, it is determined not in the big hit game or the small hit game When it is (step S301: NO), it is determined whether the change display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the special symbol is being changed (YES in step S302), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S313, but determines that the changing display of the special symbol is not being performed ( Step S302: NO), It is determined whether or not various random numbers of the second starting opening winning associated with the game ball T being received in the second starting opening 1153 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303 ).

  Specifically, various random numbers acquired upon receipt of the game ball T in the second starting opening 1153 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 and various random numbers relating to the second starting opening winning are Since a flag indicating that it has been stored is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, when various random numbers are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, it is stored based on whether or not this flag is stored. It is determined whether the various random numbers are associated with the second start-up winning or with respect to the fact that the game ball T has been received in the first starting opening 1152.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the random number relating to the second starting opening winning is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307 while the second When it is determined that the random number relating to the starting opening winning is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: NO), the number of first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 It is determined whether or not "1" is equal to or more than "1" (step S304).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of reservations is not "1" or more (step S304: NO), while ending the special symbol processing, it is determined that the number of reservations is more than "1" (Step S304: YES), the pending number is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S305).

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes shift processing of the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S306). Specifically, the big hit random number, the big hit random number for design, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 are first stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 The (oldest) one is shifted to a specific storage area of the RAM of the main control board 1113.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes the jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S307). Specifically, by executing the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the jackpot is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and determination symbol information indicating the determination result is set. Then, if it is determined that it is a big hit (type 1 big hit), the type of big hit is determined, and if it is determined that it is a small hit, game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game The types of two types of jackpots that occur triggered by events are determined. The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S308). Specifically, with reference to a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113, the determination result of the big hit determination in step S307, the type of the set determination symbol, the current gaming state The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the number of pending first special symbol determinations and the reach random number and variation pattern random number stored together with the big hit random number used in the process of step S307. By the process of step S308, it is determined whether to perform rendering with reach or to perform rendering without reach. The variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 relates to the setting information of the symbol set in the process of step S307, whether the setting information of this symbol relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. The change start command including the information indicating whether or not the setting information of the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S308, the information indicating which of the reach presence effect and the reach no effect effect is to be performed, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, etc. Are set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S309). This fluctuation start command is a command for instructing the start of fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission processing of step S9.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1116 identifies the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the change start command received from the main control board 1113, and determines which of the reach presence effect and the reach no effect needs to be performed. Acquires the fluctuation time in which the special symbol is variably displayed, and identifies the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 1115, it is determined what pattern the symbol is to be displayed (the decorative symbol is displayed) and the like, and the effect of the determined content is executed.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309 (step S310). The variation display of the special symbol is performed on the function display 1114 in a predetermined manner.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring a fluctuation time which is an elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S310 (step S313).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the processing of step S308 has elapsed since the measurement of the fluctuation time in step S311 is started (step S313) . When the main control board 1113 determines that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S313: NO), the special symbol fluctuation process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S313: YES), a symbol determination command for notifying the function display 1114 to display the determination result of the special symbol determination Are set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S314). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. As a result, processing is performed to stop and display the symbols (decorative symbols) variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in a mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination.

  Next, the main control board 1113 ends the variation display of the special symbol started in the process of step S310 (step S315). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner on the function display 1114 that was variably displayed.

  Then, the main control board 1113 resets the variation time when the measurement is started in the process of step S311 (step S316), starts the big hit game when it is a big hit, and starts the small hit game when it is a small hit. Game processing including processing is executed (step S317). The main control board 113 ends the special symbol processing when the game processing is ended. The game processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[4-7. Big hit judgment processing by main control board]
Next, the jackpot determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 executes the jackpot determination (step S3071). Specifically, when executing the big hit determination pertaining to the second start opening winning, refer to the big hit determination table (not shown) for the second start opening winning, and execute the big hit determination pertaining to the first start opening winning In the case, the first starting opening winning combination jackpot determination table (not shown) is referred to.

  The main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a single type big hit based on the determination result of step S3071 (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one type of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is referred to with reference to a big hit symbol determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. Is determined (step S3073), and a jackpot symbol according to the type of jackpot determined in step S3073 is set (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and the jackpot game is executed. When this process ends, the big hit determination process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type of big hit (step S3072: NO), the RAM relating to the second special symbol determination is stored in the RAM of the main control substrate 1113 It is determined based on whether or not the special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination according to the first starting opening winning combination (step S3075).

  If it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the lost symbol as setting information because the determination result is a loss (step S3076). As a result, the lost design is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like. When the lost control symbol is set, the main control board 1113 ends the big hit determination processing.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), it determines whether the result of the big hit determination is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, whether the big hit random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the random number value corresponding to the small hit specified in the second starting opening winning big hit determination table (not shown). Based on the heel, it is determined whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main control board 1113 transfers the process to step S3076. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the symbol at the time of a small hit prestored in the ROM of the main control board 1113 The type of small hit is determined with reference to the determination table (not shown) (step S3078). Specifically, the type of the small hit based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the small hit design random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 Decide.

  Next, the main control board 1113 sets setting information of the determined small hitting symbol (step S3079). As a result, the small hit symbol set is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like as a stop.

[4-8. Variation pattern setting process by main control board]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is one type of big hit (step S3081). If the main control board 1113 determines that there is one type of big hit (step S3081: YES), the variation pattern table for big hit is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3082). After setting the big hit fluctuation pattern table, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3088.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the type is not a big hit (step S3081: NO), it determines whether or not it is a small hit (step S3083). If the main control board 1113 determines that it is a small hit (step S3083: YES), the small hit variation pattern table is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3084). After setting the small hit variation pattern table, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3088.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a small hit (step S3083: NO), that is, if it is a loss, it is determined whether or not reach effect for causing a player to expect a big hit is performed. It determines (step S3085). Specifically, based on whether the reach random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the reach random number stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113, reach effect is performed or not Determine if

  If the main control board 1113 determines that reach effect is to be performed (step S3085: YES), the variation pattern table for reach is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3086). If it is determined not to be performed (step S3085: NO), the fluctuation pattern table for losing is read out from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3087). After setting the variation pattern for reaching or losing, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3088.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines a fluctuation pattern random number using the fluctuation pattern table set in the process of step S3082, step S3084, step S3086 or step S3087 (step S3088). Specifically, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the stored fluctuation pattern random number is selected with reference to a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the RAM of the main control board 1113. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined by this process.

  Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the main control substrate 1113 sets the selected variation pattern as setting information in the RAM of the main control substrate 1113 (step S3089). The setting information of the variation pattern is included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309, together with the symbol set in the big hit determination process, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. After setting the fluctuation pattern, the main control board 1113 ends the fluctuation pattern setting process.

[4-9. Game processing by main control board]
Next, the game processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not it is a 1-type big hit (step S3171). Here, if it is determined that one type of jackpot is found (step S3171: YES), the jackpot gaming flag is set to "ON" (step S3172).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the short time game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S3173). At this time, the short game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a short time gaming state, and is set to "ON" when shifting from the normal gaming state to the short time gaming state. It is set to "OFF" when being returned to the normal gaming state.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3173: NO), while shifting to the processing of step S3183, the time saving game flag is set to "ON" If it is determined (step S3173: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3174). When the main control board 1113 sets the time saving game flag to "OFF", the process goes to step S318.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not one type of big hit (step S3171: NO), the short time game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON". It is determined (step S3176). When the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), the number of time saving game remaining times stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is "1". The value is updated to the subtracted value (step S3177). At this time, the short game remaining number indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the time short game state, and when the time short game remaining number becomes “0”, the game state is It will be returned to the normal gaming state from the time saving gaming state.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether the number of remaining time saving games stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is “0” (step S3178). When the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game residual count is "0" (step S3178: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (step S3176: NO), or when determining that the time saving game residual count is not "0" (step S3178: NO) And the process of step S3108.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a small hit (step S3180). If the main control board 1113 determines that the game is not a small hit (step S3108: NO), the game processing is ended, while if it is determined that the game is a small hit (step S3180: YES), the small hit The game flag is set to "ON" (step S3181).

  Then, the main control board 1113 sets the start command in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S3183). Here, the start command is a period from when the big hit game is started until the big winning opening 1154 starts to be opened first, or until the small prize game is started after the starting feature winning hole 1155 starts to be opened first The command for notifying the period of time is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the main control board 1113 sets the opening command, the game processing ends.

[4-10. Normal symbol processing by main control board]
Next, normal symbol processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S401). The auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not an auxiliary game is performed to perform an operation allowing the game ball T to be accepted to the second start port 1153 a prescribed number of times by sliding the start port door member 1214. It is set to "ON" during the game, and is set to "OFF" when not in the auxiliary game. When the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary gaming flag is set to "ON" (step S401: YES), the normal symbol processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary gaming flag is not set to "ON" (step S401: NO), whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is being performed by the function display 1114 If it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not in progress (step S402: NO), the number of pending normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is "1" or more. It is determined whether there is any (step S403).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of reservations is not "1" or more (step S403: NO), it determines that the number of reservations is "1" or more while ending normal symbol processing (Step S403: YES), the pending number is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S404), and the hit random number determination process is executed (step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is one of the winning values according to the normal symbol determination stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113 Based on whether or not they match, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is hit (step S406), and when it is determined that it is a hit (step S406: YES), the function display 1114 The hit symbol to be stopped and displayed as the determination symbol is set (step S407). On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S406: NO), it sets the lost symbol (step S408).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal gaming state (step S409). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol variation time for causing the function indicator 1114 to variably display the normal symbol is set to 25 seconds (step S410) .

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the main symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds (step S411). The normal symbol variation time set in this manner is temporarily stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

  Next, the main control board 1113 causes the function indicator 1114 to start fluctuating display of the normal symbol (step S412), and starts measurement of an elapsed time from the start of the fluctuating display (step S413). When the measurement of the elapsed time is started, the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the normal symbol by the function indicator 1114 is being changed and displayed (step S402: YES), it determines whether or not to end the variation display of the normal symbol (step S402) S415). Specifically, whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is ended based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the processing of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine if

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the normal symbol variation display is not ended (step S 415: NO), the main control substrate 1113 terminates the normal symbol processing while determining that the normal symbol fluctuation display is ended. (Step S415: YES), the variation display of the normal symbol in the function indicator 1114 is ended, and the hit symbol set in the process of step S407 or the lost symbol set in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416) ).

  Next, the main control board 1113 resets the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S413 (step S417). Then, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S418).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (Step S 418: NO), it determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit while ending the normal symbol processing If it is (step S418: YES), the auxiliary gaming flag is set to "ON" (step S419). The main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing when the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON".

[4-11. Start-up door processing by main control board]
Next, the starting opening door processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S501). When the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the starting opening door process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary gaming flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), it determines whether or not the starting opening door member 1214 is in operation ( Step S502). If the main control board 1113 determines that the starting opening door member 1214 is in operation (step S502: YES), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S507.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the starting opening door member 1214 is not in operation (step S502: NO), it determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503). ). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S 503: YES), the main control board 1113 opens the second starting opening 1153 for 0.1 second as an operation pattern of the starting opening door member 1214. An operation pattern for performing one operation is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S504).

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S 503: NO), since it is a time saving gaming state, the second start as the operation pattern of the starting opening door member 1214 An operation pattern of opening the port 1153 for 0.3 seconds five times is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S505).

  Next, after setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main control board 1113 causes the starting opening door member 1214 to start the operation with the set operation pattern (step S506).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 has been completed (step S507). If the main control board 1113 determines that the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 has not been completed (NO in step S507), the starting opening door process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "OFF" (step S508). When the main game control board 1113 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF", the start opening door process is ended.

[4-12. Opening and closing control process by main control board]
Next, the opening and closing control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S601).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the open rotation control process ends. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), the elapsed time since the command was set in the process of step S3183 is previously made. It is determined whether or not the small hit game is being started based on whether or not the set time has been reached (step S602). If the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is being started (step S602: YES), it determines whether the start time has passed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the start time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the open rotation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the number of winnings of the game ball T to the winning combination 1155 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 Are reset (step S604), and the opening control of opening the combination winning opening 1155 by starting the combination opening / closing member 1221 is started (step S605).

  Opening of the prize winning opening 1155, by sliding the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 based on the opening and closing pattern set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 in the process of step S227, to open the prize winning opening 1155 .

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring an elapsed time since the opening control is started (step S606). When the measurement of the elapsed time is started, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S611.

  On the other hand, when determining that the small hit game is not in progress (step S602: NO), the main control board 1113 determines whether the small hit game is in progress (step S608). If the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is being ended (step S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S625.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the detection signal from the prize winning opening sensor 1224 (the gaming ball T is on the winning prize opening 1155) Based on the presence / absence of the input of the signal indicating that it has been accepted, it is determined whether or not the bonus game winning opening sensor 1224 detects the acceptance of the gaming ball T (step S609). When the main control board 1113 determines that the winning combination winning opening sensor 1224 has not detected the reception of the game ball T (step S609: NO), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S611.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize winning opening sensor 1224 detects the acceptance of the game ball T (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball T has won the prize winning opening 1155, The winning number of the game balls T stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S610).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the elapsed time from which the measurement was started in the process of step S606 matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). If the main control board 1113 determines that it does not match the set time (step S611: NO), it transfers the process to step S612, while if it determines that it matches the set time (step S611: YES), The rotation body 1236 is rotated to start processing for enabling the game ball T to be received by the V winning opening 1156 (step S612).

  Specifically, the main control board 1113 receives the character winning opening 1155 by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b). The game ball T accepted by the unit 1236 a can be accepted by the V winning opening 1156.

  Next, the main control board 1113 receives the detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 1239 (a signal indicating that the gaming ball T has been accepted in the V prize opening 1156), the V prize opening sensor 1239 It is determined whether the acceptance of the game ball T has been detected (step S613).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the V winning hole sensor 1239 does not detect the reception of the game ball T (step S613: NO), the V winning hole sensor 1239 moves on to the process of step S616. If it is determined that the acceptance of the gaming ball T has been detected (step S613: YES), the V prize flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to "ON" (step S614). The V prize flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball T has won a prize in the V prize hole 1156 during the small hit game and a two-type big hit has occurred, and the game ball T is prized in the V prize hole 1156 In the absence state, it is set to "OFF", and is set to "ON" when the game ball T is won in the V winning opening 1156.

  Next, the main control board 1113 sets a V prize command for notifying that the gaming ball T has won in the V prize hole 1156 during the small hit game in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S615). The V winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 1156 (step S616). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed since the rotating body 1236 is rotated.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that it is not the closing timing (step S616: NO), it transfers the process to step S620, while if it determines that the closing timing is (step S616: YES), the rotation The body 1236 is rotated to close the V winning hole 1156 (step S317). Specifically, the V winning opening 1156 is closed by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b) to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a).

  Next, the main control board 1113 opens the defined opening operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (for example, opens the prize winning opening 1155 for 3.2 seconds, based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether one operation has ended (step S620).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the regulation release operation has ended (step S620: YES), it shifts the process to step S622 while it determines that the regulation release operation has not ended (step S622) S620: NO), the number of winnings of the game ball T to the winning combination 1155 in the small hit game of this time matches the number 6 of gaming balls defining the closing timing of the winning combination 1155 stored in advance. It is determined whether or not to do (step S621).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of wins does not match “6” (step S 621: NO), it determines that the number of wins matches “6” while ending the open rotation control processing. In the case (step S621: YES), the opening control of the winning combination 1155 started in the process of step S605 is ended (step S622), and the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S606 is reset (step S623). And small hit end time is started (step S624). Here, the small hitting end time refers to a period from the end of the opening of the prize winning opening 1155 to the end of the small hitting game.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed, based on whether or not the time when the measurement is started in the process of step S 624 has reached a preset small hitting end time. (Step S625). When the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the open rotation control process is ended, while the small hit end time set in advance has elapsed If it is determined (step S625: YES), the small hit game flag is set to "OFF" to end the small hit game (step S626), and a small hit end command for notifying the end of the small hit game It is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S627). This small hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S 628). When the main control board 1113 determines that the V prize flag is not set to "ON" (step S628: NO), it is determined that the gaming ball T has not won in the V prize opening 1156 during the small hitting game. If, on the other hand, it is determined that the V prize flag is set to "ON" (step S628: YES), the V prize flag is set to "OFF" (step S628). S629), in order to start the big hit game following the small hit game, the big hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S630), and the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S631).

4-13. Main winning board opening control process by the main control board]
Next, the special winning opening opening control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the big hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S 701). When the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the special winning opening open control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), after setting the start command relating to the big hit game by the process of step S3183. Based on whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is starting (step S702).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game is being started (step S702: YES), whether the start time has elapsed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined start time or not It is determined (step S703). When the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has not elapsed (step S703: NO), the special winning opening open control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has passed (step S703: YES), it determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 1154, etc. It is stored in the RAM of the control board 1113 (step S704). By the process of step S704, various time-related times for a big hit game such as an interval time between a round and the next round, an end time after the end of the final round (ending time) are also set.

  Next, the main control board 1113 resets the number of winnings of the game ball T to the large winning opening 1154 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S705), and the big hit round stored in the RAM The number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S706). The number of rounds is set to “0” before the start of the jackpot, and “1” is added each time the process of step S706 is performed.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts open control of the special winning opening 1154 (step S 707), and starts measurement of open time which is an elapsed time after the open control is started (step S 708). Then, a round start command for notifying that the round game has been started is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S709). After setting the round start command, the main control board 1113 shifts the processing to step S716.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is not in progress (step S702: NO), it is determined at which point in the big hit game the current state stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 Based on the information to be shown, it is determined whether or not the big hit just after the end of the last round is in progress (step S711). If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is in progress (step S711: YES), the process proceeds to step S725.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is not in progress (step S711: NO), the main control board 1113 is a round based on the information indicating which time in the big hit game the current state stored is. It is determined whether it is in the middle (between the round and the next round) (step S 712).

  If it is determined that the main control board 1113 is in the middle of a round (step S 712: YES), the big winning opening 1154 is closed at the end of the previous round, and then the rounds set by the process of step S 704 It is determined whether time has passed (step S713).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S 713: YES), it is time to start the next round, so the process moves on to step S 705. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S713: NO), the special winning opening open control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not during the round (step S 712: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the round is in progress, and the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 1206 Based on the presence / absence of the input of the signal indicating that the ball T has been received, it is determined whether or not the game ball T has been received in the large winning opening 1154 (step S714).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the game ball T is not received in the big winning opening 1154 (step S714: NO), the processing is transferred to the step S716, while the game ball T is placed in the big winning opening 1154. If it is determined that acceptance has been detected (step S 714: YES), the number of winnings of the game ball T is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S 715).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the predetermined opening time has elapsed from the start of opening the special winning opening 1154 (step S716). Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time for which measurement has been started by the process of step S 708 has reached a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) stored in advance.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the specified release time has elapsed (step S 716: YES), it transfers the process to step S 718 while determines that the specified release time has not elapsed (step S 718). S716: NO), the number of winning game balls T in the current round stored in the RAM of the main control board 11113 defines the closing timing of the big winning opening 1154 stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113 It is determined whether or not it matches the game ball number "9" (step S717). Here, when it is determined that the winning number does not match "9" (step S717: NO), the special winning opening open control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the winning number matches “9” (step S717: YES), the opening control of the special winning opening 1154 is ended (step S718).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current round number of the big hit game stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the round number set by the process of step S704 (step S719).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the number of rounds does not match the set number of rounds (step S 719: NO), the special winning opening 1154 is closed to control the start timing of the next round. Start measuring the time between rounds which is the elapsed time from step S720 (step S720). The time between rounds whose measurement has been started by the process of step S720 is used for the process of step S713. When the measurement of the time between rounds is started, the main control board 1113 ends the special winning opening open control process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of rounds matches the predetermined number of rounds (step S719: YES), the main control board 1113 starts measuring the end time (step S722), and resets the stored number of rounds. Then, the big hit end command is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S724). This big hit end command is a command for notifying that the last opening of the big winning opening 1154 is finished, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission processing of step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (step S725). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big hit end time of starting measurement by the process of step S722 has reached the big hit end time set by the process of step S704. When the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (step S 725: NO), the main winning opening open control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit end time has elapsed (step S 725: YES), it executes the gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 after the big hit game is over (step S726). Then, in order to end the big hit game, the big hit game flag is set to "OFF" (step S727). When the big hit game flag is set to “OFF”, the main control board 1113 ends the big winning opening control process.

4-14. Processing of game state setting by main control board]
Next, the gaming state setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether the present big hit game is a big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261). Specifically, if a big hit game is played following a small hit game, the big hit game flag is set to "ON" in the process of step S630, and if it is not a big hit game following a small hit game, step S3172 Since the big hit game flag is set to "ON" in the process, whether the current big hit game is a continuation of the small hit game based on which process the big hit flag is set to "ON" judge.

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261: NO), a big hit symbol (the RAM of the main control board 1113 stopped and displayed on the function indicator 1114 at the start of the big hit game) Based on the setting information of the jackpot symbol stored in the), it is determined whether or not there is time saving after the end of the jackpot game (step S7262). If the main control board 1113 determines the presence or absence of time saving after the end of the big hit game, the process proceeds to step S7264.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261: YES), a small hit symbol (stored small hit symbol displayed stopped on the function indicator 1114 at the start of the small hit game) Based on the setting information), the presence or absence of time saving after the end of the big hit game is determined (step S7263).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines the presence or absence of time saving after the end of the big hit game (step S7264). If the main control board 1113 determines that there is no time saving (step S7264: NO), the main control board 1113 transfers the process to step S7267. On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that there is a time saving (step S7264: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S7265), and the time saving game remaining number is set to "100" ( Step S7266). Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state in which the second starting opening 1153 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is performed 100 times after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7264: NO), the processing of step S7265 and step S7266 is not performed, so it is difficult for the second starting opening 1153 to be opened after the big hit game is over The game is controlled in the normal gaming state.

  Then, the main control board 1113 sets a gaming state command for notifying the peripheral control board 1116 of the gaming state after the end of the current big hit game in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S7267). The game state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the game control command is set in the RAM of the main control board, the main control board 1113 ends the special winning opening open control process.

[5. Characteristic Effect of the First Embodiment of the Present Invention]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the game state which changes as the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 (the game to the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153 According to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the ball T), when the game product winning opening 1155 becomes acceptable, the bonus such as the payout of the game ball T is awarded when the game ball T is accepted to the winning character winning opening 1155 Since it is possible, the player can perform the hitting operation of the game ball T aiming at the prize winning opening 1155, and enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball T to suppress the decrease in interest can do. Since it is possible to receive game media according to the game state, the winning combination 1155 is limited to the gaming ball T to the winning combination 1155. It is possible to reduce the award of benefits by receiving the game ball T, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is sent to the upper opening 1238b side opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body When the receiving portion 1236a of 1236 is positioned at the storage position facing upward, the gaming ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and the rotating body 1236 is rotated and received in that state. When the part 1236a is turned to the discharge position facing the right, the gaming ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V prize opening 1156, and a bonus (big hit game different from the prize winning opening 1155) ), And the player can be entertained by the granted benefit, and the V winning hole 1156 is received through the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Since a bonus is given when the technical ball T is accepted, the player is snarled and pounded by whether the gaming ball T received by the prize winning opening 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 or not. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the V winning hole 1156 and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  When the rotating body 1236 rotates the plunger 1232 a of the V prize solenoid 1232, the entire driving gear member 1233 is a shaft by the engaging portion 1233 d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232 a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 which rotates around 1233a and engages with the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the drive gear member 1233 rotates in the direction opposite to the drive gear member 1233. As the driven gear member 1234 pivots, the rotor 1236 pivots between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotational speed of the rotary body 1236 is faster than when the motor is rotated by a motor as in a conventional pachinko machine, so the player can play the game ball T on the receiver 1236a of the rotary body 1236. Even if it is going to take the timing of hitting of the game ball T so that it is accommodated, it is possible to make the timing difficult. Therefore, it is difficult to accommodate the game ball T in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so it is possible to make the game ball T hard to be received by the V prize opening 1156 It is possible to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the grant.

  Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (the rotating body 1236) should be larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. As compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, as the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 is increased, the timing is taken even if the player attempts to hit the game ball T so that the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It can be difficult.

  Furthermore, behind the upper opening 1238b, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided with a losing hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T that has circulated from the prize winning opening 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when other than the accommodation position. The game balls T can be prevented from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the prize winning opening 1155. Therefore, even if the game ball T is made to enter the prize winning opening 1155 due to some injustice, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the receiver 1236a if the receiver 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is other than the accommodation position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given illegally, and to reduce an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to a fraud. Particularly, in the present embodiment, in the normal state where the prize winning opening 1155 can not be received, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is pivoted to the V prize opening 1156 side coincident with the right portion opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is made to enter the prize winning opening 1155, it can be recognized at first glance that the game ball T can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so it is illegal. It is possible to forgive the act and to prevent the act of fraud.

  Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than in the past, the game ball T can be rotated faster even if it is attempted to illegally receive the game ball T into the V winning hole 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236). By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it can be recognized that it is difficult for the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 to receive a seemingly illegal game ball T, making it possible to discourage fraudulent acts and cheating The pachinko machine 1 can have high deterrence against In addition, since it is possible to prevent fraud, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a when the receiving portion 1236a opened on the outer peripheral side is rotated from the housing position to the release position. Since the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a between the storage position and the discharging position even if the centrifugal force by the rotation acts on the gaming ball T from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force It is possible to prevent the game balls T from jumping out, and the game balls T can be reliably moved to the release position. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the game ball T from jumping out of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 in rotation by the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be made faster, A pachinko machine 1 can be provided which makes it difficult to take timing of the body 1236 and reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is changed according to the game state which changes as the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. The prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the prize unit 1220 can move, and the prize winning opening 1155 can receive the game ball T according to the special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the In the state, when the game ball T is received into the prize winning opening 1155, a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls T is awarded, so the gaming ball T aimed at the prize winning opening 1155 against the player Can be entertained by performing the When the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 with the aim of the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted by the prize winning opening 1155, a privilege is awarded, and the player is further enjoyed by the privilege given. Can. The game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is guided to the upper opening 1238 b formed at the upper portion of the peripheral wall 1238 a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238 e of the V winning opening unit 1220 B. , And contacts the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b. At this time, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, when the receiving portion 1236a matches the right part opening 1238c, From the receiver 1236a through the right part opening 1238c, it enters into the right guiding part 1238f, is guided by the right guiding part 1238f, is accepted by the V prize opening 1156, is granted a bonus such as a big hit game, and is granted by the granted benefit It is possible to further entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest. Since only one receiving portion 1236a is provided on this rotating body 1236, there is a loss which is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 as compared with the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in a conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 is such that it is easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for a beginner or a player who is not accustomed to the operation of hitting the game ball T because there is no receiving portion 1236a. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and the game with the pachinko machine 1 can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. can do.

  In addition, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game balls T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, compared with the case where a plurality of receiving portions are provided on the rotating body as in the related art, The outer diameter can be reduced, and the space for arranging the rotary body 1236 can be easily secured in the game area 1100, and the rotational freedom of the rotary body 1236 can be increased to effectively arrange the rotary body 1236. It can be arranged. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end face of the rotating body 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is Even if the size is smaller than the conventional one, it can be avoided that the rotating body 1236 (the receiving unit 1236a) becomes hard to see, and it is possible to suppress the enjoyment decline due to enjoying the game by the rotating body 1236.

  Furthermore, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized such that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e behind the upper opening 1238b. And the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is in alignment with the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T which has flowed down through the upper opening 1238b is reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a. Even if another game ball T from above the game ball T received by the receiver 1236a abuts, another game ball T received by the receiver 1236a abuts with another game ball T It is possible to suppress dropping off from the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is surely made to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. It can be sent.

  In addition, since the back hole of the upper opening 1238b is provided with the missing hole 1230c communicating with the upper guiding portion 1238e and the second discharge path 1230e, in a state where the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not coincide with the upper opening 1238b, Even if the game ball T flows down from the side of the prize winning opening 1155 and abuts on the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. . On the other hand, in a state where the game ball T has already been received by the receiver 1236a after the receiver 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, another game ball T flows down from the prize winning opening 1155 side Even if the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a through the upper opening 1238b is abutted from the upper side, another game ball T coming from behind is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received by the prize winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are ejected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V winning hole 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is to be noted that one of the plurality of game balls T received by the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 and accepted by the V winning opening 1156 and a benefit is given, so that the rotating body 1236 Even if there is a game ball T which is discharged from the hole 1230c without being received by the receiving portion 1236a, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest Can.

  In addition, since the game balls T that can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 are discharged to the rear side of the rotating body 1236 from the lost holes 1230c, the game can not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the left and right of the rotating body 1236, the size of the front view of the V winning opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in arranging the rotary body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, and therefore, the rotary body 1236 can be arranged at an effective location in the game area 1100 and the player can easily see the rotary body 1236. It is possible to enjoy the game played by the rotating body 1236 and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238 b is formed slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236 a of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game balls T, and from the center of the game balls T received by the receiving portion 1236 a Since another gaming ball T coming from behind comes in contact with the slightly backward position, the gaming machine ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the upper opening through the upper guiding portion 1238e When another game ball T from 1238b abuts on the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a from above, guiding the other game ball T contacted from above to the rear with the lost hole 1230c. It is possible to reliably discharge another gaming ball T coming from behind through the second hole 1230 e from the lost hole 1230 c through the second discharge path 1230 e.

  In addition, another gaming ball T coming from behind comes in contact with a position slightly behind the center of the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so the game received by the receiving portion 1236a A force acts on the ball T so as to be pushed forward on the opposite side to the missing hole 1230c, so that it is difficult for the ball T to drop off to the missing hole 1230c side, and the state of being received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 dropping out and losing the opportunity to be received to the V prize hole 1156, The game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a can be reliably received by the V winning opening 1156, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the front side (inner side) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a in the rotating body 1236, there is provided an inclined portion 1236b which is inclined obliquely backward as it goes upward (away from the rotation center) By forming the center of the upper opening 1238b slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a that receives the game balls T, the gaming ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Since the gaming ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, when the gaming ball T flows down from the upper opening 1238b, the gaming ball T contacts the inclined portion 1236, and the gaming ball T is moved by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be guided forward to be easily received into the receiving portion 1236a. When the gaming ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the gaming ball T first contacts the inclined portion 1236b and abuts against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, thereby alleviating an impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The rotor 1236 can be made more difficult to break, and the flow speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a to abut against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made hard to bounce, and the gaming ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238 e is bent in a crank shape, the flow speed of the gaming ball T being guided by the upper guiding portion 1238 e can be attenuated. Therefore, even if another gaming ball T, which has flowed through the upper guiding portion 1238e, abuts on the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the flow speed can be increased by circulating the upper guiding portion 1238e. Is attenuated, the impact due to contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a bounces from the receiving portion 1236a This can be made difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a to drop out of the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, and the flow speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e. The shock acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced even when it circulates through the portion 1238e and contacts (contacts) the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper opening 1238b, It is possible to prevent the rotor 1236 from being easily damaged by an impact due to the Therefore, the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the rotating body 1236 can prevent the player from feeling frustrated and reducing the interest in the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player. Can.

  In addition, in order to receive the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 through the rotating body 1236, it is necessary to open the winning feature opening / closing member 1221 so that the winning feature opening 1155 can be received. An opportunity to receive the ball T into the V winning opening 1156 (the prize winning opening 1155) can be limited, and a premium feeling can be given to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, according to the game state, when the winning combination 1155 can be accepted, there is an opportunity to receive the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156, so the winning combination 1155, rotating body 1236, and V winning 1156 The player can be made to pay attention to the player etc., and the feeling of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 can be enhanced, and the game ball T hitting the prize winning opening 1155 is made to the player. The operation can be actively performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable starting opening unit 1210, the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 extends laterally to guide the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 disposed on the right end side. Of the slider portion 1214g of the start opening door member 1214 on the left side of the second start opening 1153, after making the heights of the first guide 1214a, the second guide 1214b, and the third guide 1214c different from each other possible. Attach the start opening solenoid 1215 to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a advances and retracts on the opposite side to the left and right with the second start opening 1153 on the upper side and on the rear side of the first guide 1214a and the second guide 1214b. The game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the starting opening solenoid 1215 The lower case 1211 is slidably supported by the lower case 1211 to advance and retract the movable plunger 1215a according to the changing gaming state (according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134). Since the start opening door member 1214 is made to slide back and forth by transmitting to the start opening door member 1214, the front and back and upper and lower dimensions of the mechanism (variable start opening unit 1210) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 Can be smaller than conventional ones. Therefore, since the installation space for providing the variable start opening unit 1210 having the start opening door member 1214 which slides back and forth according to the gaming state can be reduced, the start opening door sliding back and forth in the game area 1100 The arrangement freedom of the member 1214 can be enhanced, and the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be largely changed by arranging the starting opening door member 1214 at a place where it has not been possible to arrange in the past pachinko machine Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal for the player who wants to strongly select the player as a pachinko machine that attracts the interest of the player.

  In addition, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable starting opening unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable starting opening unit 1210 having the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, And since it becomes possible to equip other members with the pachinko machine 1 without problems, without pressing other members such as character and the like, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the decorative effect and the rendering effect by the other members. Thus, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal of the player.

  Furthermore, while arranging the second start opening 1153 on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, the first guide 1214a, the second guide 1214b and the third guide extending to the left and right of the start opening door member 1214 Since the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by 1214 c, when the starting opening door member 1214 is protruded into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the first guidance of the starting opening door member 1214 When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c and is accepted by the second starting opening 1153. Play on the first guide 1214 a, the second guide 1214 b, and the third guide 1214 c by rolling the game ball T toward the second start opening 1153. Second for the acceptance of the starting opening 1153 can cause enhanced expectation, interest and to entertain the player it can be prevented from being lowered relative to the person. At this time, when the starting opening door member 1214 sliding forward and backward slides the gaming ball T to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the third guiding portion 1214c. Since the action of the starting opening door member 1214 is opposite to that of a conventional pachinko machine variable receiving port (variable winning hole), a strong impact may be given to a player or the like who is used to the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal.

  Further, in a state where the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 are slid forward and projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end side, so it is possible to roll over the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b and the third guide portion 1214c which extend to the left and right. The player can be made to show the movement of the moving game ball T, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b and the third guiding portion 1214c. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, when the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is advanced and retracted to the left and right according to the gaming state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a is moved to the left and right with the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1215a. The body part 1216a also extends vertically through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging part 1216c and the main body part 1216a so as to revolve around an axis extending vertically about the main body part 1216a so as to move. It will turn around the axis. A connection hole 1216e at the end of the second piece 1216d extending at a right angle to the first piece 1216b from the main body 1216a is engaged with and coupled to a connection pin 1214h projecting from the slider portion 1214g of the start opening door member 1214 Therefore, the connection hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves up and down around the axis when the main body 1216a rotates, and the connection hole 1216e revolves through the connection pin 1214h and the slider 1214g. As a result, the start opening door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, forward / backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 can be transmitted to reliably slide the starting opening door member 1214 back and forth, thereby reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects. be able to.

  Further, since the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length extending to the slider portion 1214g on the lower side of the starting opening solenoid 1215 of the starting opening door member 1214 and is shorter than in the prior art, the starting opening door member is relatively The sliding range before and after 1214 can be narrowed, and the dimensions before and after can be made smaller than before. In addition, since the link member 1216 is rotated about the vertically extending axis, the size of the upper and lower portions is smaller than in the conventional case where it is rotated about the axially extending axis. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable start opening unit 1210) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 can be realized that reliably exerts the above-described effects. it can.

  In addition, since the gaming ball T received in the second starting opening 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 through the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 The lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 are provided with a passage member or the like for receiving the game ball T received in the second starting opening 1153 on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 as compared to the case where they are guided and released. There is no need to make it easy to secure a space behind the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and a character on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210. Thus, it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 1100, even when the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is in the non-acceptable position retracted backward, the second starting opening 1153 is inside the gaming area 1100. And the second starting opening 1153 is not closed, so that the player can have an illusion that the game ball T can be received by the second starting opening 1153. Of the second start port 1153. Therefore, since the second starting opening 1153 is always open, it is possible to make the player direct attention to the second starting opening 1153 regardless of the movement (slide) of the starting opening door member 1214, and thus the player In addition, it is possible to make it hard to get bored by having a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 and making the second starting opening 1153 for the player regardless of the position of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to perform a hitting operation of the game ball T aiming for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the interest in the game.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the starting opening door member 1214 is positioned at any of the forwardly receivable position and the backward retreating position, When viewed from the front, since it looks the same, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the position of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, since the position of the starting opening door member 1214 is hard to be understood, the player can be illusiveed that the starting opening door member 1214 is in the acceptable position projecting forward, and the player aims the starting opening door member 1214 It is possible to make the game ball T be hit and entertained.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the extra receipt of the gaming ball T, the special lottery result in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the gaming ball T additionally received to the second starting opening 1153 is a drawing It can be avoided that it is done, and it can control that the burden on the game hall side increases.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down the second start opening 1153, the second start opening 1153 flows The second starting opening upper shelf 1161j prevents the game ball T from being directly received by the second starting opening 1153 because the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is disposed below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j of the path forming member 1161. The second start opening upper shelf 1161 j is discharged downward from the left end. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extends in the left and right direction (according to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134) in accordance with the game state which changes as the game ball T is hit into the game area 100. The game ball T discharged downward from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j in a state of sliding forward in the game area 1100 is a second starting opening in a plan view of the starting opening door member 1214. When flowing down to the left outer part of the upper shelf 1161 j, the gaming ball T rolls on the starting opening door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting opening 1153, and is accepted by the second starting opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153, a benefit such as a payout of the game ball T or a lottery of a special lottery result is given, so that the player can be entertained by the given bonus. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the start opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T can be received into the second start opening 1153.

  The left and right starting opening door member 1214 slides in the front and rear direction different from the acceptable direction of the second starting opening 1153 facing the left direction of the gaming ball T, and the starting opening in the game area 1100 When the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214 when sliding the door member 1214 from the protruding state to the non-projecting state (immersed state), the gaming ball T is flat on the starting opening door member 1214 Since it takes a certain amount of time from the left outside of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second starting opening 1153 visually, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214 When the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted and retracted, the game ball T is dropped from the starting opening door member 1214 without being received by the second starting opening 1153. . More specifically, while the gaming ball T is rolling rightward toward the second starting opening 1153, the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, whereby the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 on which the gaming ball T is placed is The size gradually decreases, and before the gaming ball T reaches the second starting opening 1153, it will drop off from the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, extra receiving of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 can be reduced, so that the bonus (in particular, unnecessary) is caused by the reception of the game ball T to the extra second starting opening 1153. It is possible to reduce the award of the special lottery result in which the advantageous gaming state occurs, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  When the game ball T flows down onto the start opening door member 1214 when the start opening door member 1214 slides forward so as to protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T is moved by the start opening door member 1214. It may be guided to the second starting port 1153 and accepted. However, since the starting opening door member 1214 slides according to the gaming state, it is difficult to know the timing at which the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the gaming area 1100, and the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the gaming area 1100. Since the player must hit the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 after confirming that it has protruded, the starting opening door member 1214 slides so as to protrude into the game area 1100. During this time, the possibility of the game ball T flowing down onto the starting opening door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214, it acts on the starting opening door member 1214 by the abutment of the game ball T. A drive mechanism (start opening solenoid 1215 for sliding the start opening door member 1214 only by the impact acting on the slide groove 1211 d in the lower case 1211 of the variable start opening unit 1210 slidably supporting the start opening door member 1214 And the link member 1216), which hardly causes damage to the start opening door member 1214 or the like (variable start opening unit 1210).

  Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 is short as compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, since the time from the state where the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 to the retraction and insertion can be shortened, the gaming ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214 It is possible to immerse the starting opening door member 1214 before it is done, and to make it difficult for the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. In addition, since the starting opening door member 214 is slid in the front-rear direction, a space for inserting the starting opening door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding are disposed behind the game area 1100. The inside of the game area 1100 is not compressed by the mechanism (the start opening solenoid 1215, the link member 1216, etc.) for sliding the start opening door member 1214 so that the inside of the play area 1100 can be used as wide as possible Can.

  Further, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening door member 1214 is formed flat without a protrusion, the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100. Even when the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214 when sliding it back so as to immerse from the set state, the game ball T is pulled to the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the projection and the starting opening door The game ball T can be dropped smoothly from the top of the starting opening door member 1214 without difficulty of falling from the member 1214 or without the gaming ball T jumping up to the second starting opening 1153 by the projection, as described above. It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects.

  Furthermore, the game ball T can be received from the left direction with respect to the second start opening 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the start opening door member 1214 extending left and right enters the second start opening 1153 as it is Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that when the gaming ball T is guided to the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening 1153 can be reliably received. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, it is possible to make sure that the second starting opening 1153 is accepted if the game ball T is made to flow down the starting opening door member 1214 As a result, it is possible to positively perform the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the starting opening door member 1214 is caused to slide in and out of the game area 1100 by advancing and retracting the plunger 1215 a which is moved by energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215, so that the starting opening door member 1214 is The sliding speed of the starting opening door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration as compared with the case where the motor is made to slide. Therefore, since the starting opening door member 1214 can be slid quickly, the starting opening door member 1214 can be moved to the game area 1100 while the gaming ball T on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153. It is possible to retract from the inside, and it is possible to reliably reduce that the extra game ball T is received into the second starting opening 1153, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes as the game ball T is hit into the game area 110 by the operation of the player. The game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is the first one of the front flow path forming member 1161 when the start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the normal lottery result. When it flows down to the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls to the left by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and when discharged from the left end side, it flows down to the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. , The first opening 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 located below between the second starting opening region left upright wall portion 1161m and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and the starting opening Distributed in the U-turn shape by being guided to the right on the side opposite to the left along the member 1214, and thus received in the second start hole 1153. Then, when the gaming ball T is received by the second starting opening 1153, the payout of the gaming ball T and the lottery of the special lottery result are performed as a benefit, so that the player can be entertained by the benefit and the gaming ball is It is possible to enjoy the hitting operation (right-handed hitting) of the gaming ball T aiming at the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j so that T is received to the second start opening 1153. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 is bent obliquely to the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 below between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, the player can see the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 side when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be made to recognize, and it can be made to raise an expectation for acceptance of game ball T to the 2nd starting opening 1153. Further, in the start opening door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second start opening 1153 and the second guide portion 1214b close to the second start opening 1153 have different inclination angles, and the first guide portion Since the acceleration of the game ball T is fast in 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow in the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the portion where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the rolling speed of the game ball T which has not changed on the starting opening door member changes, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, making it difficult for the player to get bored. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes and differs between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting opening door member 1214, it rolls on the starting opening door member 1214. The player can strongly draw the attention of the player to the playing ball T, and can make it pay attention, and by making the game ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 pay attention, the starting opening door member 1214 The expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 to which the game ball T is guided can be enhanced.

  In addition, the first guiding portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the gaming ball T abuts on the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above, it feels ugly Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so it becomes possible to distribute the game ball T along the start opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right. The game ball T can be moved as intended on the starting opening door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T is hit from above with respect to the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. In the game state, it is possible to cause the player to recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214 a is reflected to the right with the second start port 1153 when it is touched. Accordingly, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the second starting opening 1153 can receive the gaming ball T when the gaming ball T is allowed to flow down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be done. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the player is aggressively hit the game ball T aiming at the first guiding portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to make the player entertain and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed within a range of 0.2 times to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T can be made by the first guide portion 1214a. Can be reliably guided to the second starting opening 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be made easy to see by suppressing the rolling speed of the game ball T becoming faster than necessary. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game medium and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the left and right length of the starting opening door member 1214 in plan view is formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 Allows the player to appropriately show the gaming ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 toward the second starting opening 1153 without excess or deficiency, and enjoys the movement of the impacting gaming ball T. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movement of the game ball T and to prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  In addition, when the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the gaming area 1100 when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the gaming area 1100 according to the gaming state, the starting opening door The game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second start opening 1153, that is, to the first guide portion 1214a side, so the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the start opening door member 1214 Flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the start opening door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T by the start opening door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a It is possible to make sure that the game is shown, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed immediately above the starting opening door member 1214 so as to circulate the gaming ball T in a U-turn shape, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j becomes the starting opening door member 1214 As compared with the case where the game ball T is distributed in a crank shape by disposing the game ball T at a position on the left outside of the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the top of the The space in the left-right direction occupied by the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161 j and the like can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be arranged in the game area 1100 in a place easy for the player to see. The pachinko machine 1 to play can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the gaming area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second starting opening area standing wall portion 1161m extends vertically to the left outside of the first guiding portion 1214a. Before the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j flows down on the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening area left upright wall portion 1161m is brought into contact with the left guiding wall 1214a. The game ball T can be reliably flowed down onto the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the When the game ball T, which has flowed down between the two starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m, contacts the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214 a) and bounces, the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m The ball T can be reliably prevented from flowing to the side opposite to the second starting opening 1153 side, and the gaming ball T can be reliably guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214 it can.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player flows down to the upper side of the second starting opening 1153 opened forward, the second The second start opening upper shelf 1161j contacts the second start opening upper shelf 1161j directly above the start opening 1153 and rolls leftward from the position immediately above the second start opening 1153 by the second start opening upper shelf 1161j according to the inclination of the upper surface It is discharged from the left end side distant from the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and comes into contact with the second starting opening area left upright wall portion 1161 m. At this time, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, whereby the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. The game ball T released from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and in contact with the second start opening area left upright wall 1161 m abuts on the start opening door member 1214 and the start opening door member 1214 It is guided to the front side of the second start opening 1153 and is received in the second start opening 1153. At this time, since the second start opening region right upright wall portion 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second start opening 1153 on the same side as the side where the second start opening upper shelf 1161j is high. Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second start opening 1153 by the start opening door member 1214 passes by the front side of the second start opening 1153, it passes in contact with the second start opening area right upright wall portion 1161k The game ball T guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is received into the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153, a bonus such as a payout of the game ball T or a lottery result of a special lottery is given, and the player can be entertained by the given bonus. In order for the game ball T to be received into the second start opening 1153, it is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the second start opening 1153. Then, before the game ball T is received in the second start opening 1153, the game ball T abuts on the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j, the second start opening area left upright wall 1161 m, and the start opening door member 1214. Thus, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T whose movement direction is a U-turn and the distribution direction changes rapidly, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Also, as described above, when the gaming ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j while the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T makes a U-turn as described above. Therefore, when the distribution direction of the game balls T changes by 180 degrees, the distribution speed of the game balls T becomes relatively slow. Therefore, it becomes easy to see the movement of the game ball T circulating in a U-turn shape, so it is easy for the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes in the gaming area 1100, in a state where the gaming ball T circulates in a U-turn shape and the starting opening door member 1214 does not protrude in the gaming area 1100, the gaming ball T Is circulated in an inverted L-shape, so that even if the game ball T is made to flow down to the same second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j according to the projection of the start opening door member 1214, the movement of the game ball T is differentiated. be able to. Therefore, the movement (flow) of the gaming ball T changes according to the gaming state (in response to the passage of the gate member 1134 by the gaming ball T), so the gaming ball T of various movements is shown to the player It can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and to decrease the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 arranged at the top and bottom, only one game ball T can be circulated, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening Since the space between the top and bottom of the door member 1214 is narrowed as much as possible, the game ball T flowing from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second start opening left upright wall portion 1161 m and flowing onto the start opening door member 1214 The motion of the player can be made to make a U-turn motion rapidly, so the player can be entertained by the motion of the game ball T which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game is entertaining It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is longer than the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j in the left and right direction, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161 j, the starting opening door member 1214 is easily noticeable, and the player can be strongly attracted to the protruding starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, by causing the player to pay attention to the starting opening door member 1214 when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j near the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161 m The game ball T rolling on the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161 j and the start opening door member 1214 can be reliably viewed, and moves in a U-turn shape. The movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed, and the game ball T is aimed at the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j so that the game ball T circulates on the start opening door member 1214 for the player. An operation can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T is circulated on the starting opening door member 1214 via the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m while the starting opening door member 1214 is projecting, the second Since it is guided to the starting opening 1153 and accepted in the second starting opening 1153, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes according to the game state, the game ball T for the starting opening door member 1214 for the player It is possible to actively perform a hitting operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161 j to send the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the game ball T struck into the game area 1100 aiming at the second start opening 1153 flows down on the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j, it rolls in the left direction away from the second start opening 1153. The game ball T can be made to feel disappointing to the player by moving away from the second starting opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is released from the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j, if the start opening door member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T separated from the second start opening 1153 is moved by the start opening door member 1214. It rolls in the right direction approaching the second start opening 1153. That is, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and comes back to the second start opening 1153, the player can be pleased and the expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second start opening 1153 is enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the second start opening region right standing wall portion 1161k extending up and down to the second start opening upper shelf 1161j is provided on the right outside of the second start opening 1153, the second start opening upper shelf extending to the left and right Even when trying to receive the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of the 1161 j is high to the second starting opening 1153 arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, from the right outside of the second starting opening 1153 The second starting opening region right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received into the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, in order to allow the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T, it is necessary to allow the gaming ball T to flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is lowered. It is possible to urge the player to perform an operation of hitting the game ball T aiming at the top of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the game ball T is made by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m, and the starting opening door member 1214. Since the user is guided in the direction of the second start opening 1153 by making a U-turn, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball T circulating in a swirling manner, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T into the second start opening 1153 Can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is hit into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state is changed by the hit game ball T, and the game state is changed. In response, the start opening door member 1214 which extends in the lateral direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 slides forward and protrudes into the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, a second start opening right upright wall portion 1161k projecting forward on the right side of the second start opening 1153 is disposed, and a second start opening right is positioned above the second start opening 1153. A second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 so that the left side is lower from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k is arranged, and the starting opening door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When projecting inward, the left end of the starting opening door member 1214 extends outside the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, it rolls over the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j toward the left end and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the gaming ball T will be received on the starting opening door member 1214 with a very high probability. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the upper side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 and the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T is made to flow down, the game ball T is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, the gaming ball T received on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, and the third guiding portion 1214c. When the start opening 1153 is accepted, a payout of the game ball T or a lottery of a special lottery result is performed as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extends in the lateral direction so as to be able to receive the plurality of gaming balls T in the lateral direction (approximately four times the outer diameter of the gaming ball T), It becomes possible to make the player illusion that many gaming balls T can be received into the second starting opening 1153. More specifically, when the player gets used to playing with a conventional pachinko machine having an opening and closing member extending to the left and right, interest in the size of the opening and closing member extending to the left and right becomes stronger, corresponding to the opening and closing member As for the size of a certain entrance (for example, a big winning opening), the interest becomes relatively weak. That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening and closing member is in the left and right direction, the more game balls T can be received. Therefore, it recognizes that the starting opening door member 1214 which protrudes in the game area 1100 and extends to the left and right according to the gaming state is the opening and closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the starting opening door member 1214 is elongated in the left and right From this, it will be illusiveed that it can accept many gaming balls T. Then, the player can make the hitting operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 by the illusion of the player be actively performed, thereby making the player entertain and suppressing the decrease in interest it can. On the other hand, since the second starting opening 1153 where the gaming ball T is guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is actually formed in a size where only one gaming ball T can be received, on the starting opening door member 1214 Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they can not be accepted at one time and can only be accepted one by one. Therefore, the number of accepted game balls T per hour can be reduced compared to the prior art, and the benefit to be granted is By relatively reducing the amount, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In addition, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153 even when aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j in addition to the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is disposed above the starting opening door member 1214 (second starting opening 1153), substantially the entire length of the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is It can be made to be the same as having received the game ball T across, and by putting many game balls T, a player can be entertained. At this time, a plurality of gaming balls T exist simultaneously on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j because the lower end of the left side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Even if it is, one by one will be delivered on the starting opening door member 1214 and guided to the second starting opening 1153, and it will be avoided that many gaming balls T are accepted into the second starting opening 1153 at one time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, since the second start opening upper shelf 1161 j and the second start opening right upright wall 1161 k protruding into the game area 1100 are provided on the upper side and the right side of the second start opening 1153, the game is performed by the start opening door member 1214 If the ball T is not guided to the second start opening 1153, it is difficult to cause the second start opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. Therefore, since the game ball T can not be received by the second starting opening 1153 unless the starting opening door member 1214 is protruded, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by the opening of the starting opening door member 1214. The protrusion of the starting opening door member 1214 can make the player think that there is something good to be done, and the player's expectation for the game is enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest Can.

  Furthermore, since the upright wall portion 1214 e extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214 c of the start opening door member 1214 is provided, the first guide portion inclined so that the right side of the start opening door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided to the front side of the second starting opening 1153 by the 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b abuts the front wall of the second starting opening 1153 by contacting the standing wall portion 1214e, and further to the right It can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes in the game area 1100 to the right of the second starting opening 1153, so this second starting opening The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the gaming ball T received by the starting opening door member 1214 can be reliably guided to and received by the second starting opening 1153.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to project into the game area 1100, many games are performed as compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is rotated and protruded. It can reduce that the starting opening door member 1214 is easy to be damaged by the impact by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the starting opening door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left and right direction and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the starting opening door member protrudes It is difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side of the starting opening door member and to sufficiently counteract the impact of receiving many game balls T. There is a risk that On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side can be made longer than the portion of the starting opening door member 1214 that protrudes into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact of receiving many game balls T.

  In addition, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to project into the game area 1100, when the game ball T is present on the starting opening door member 1214, the starting opening door member 1214 slides rearward. Then, depending on the position of the gaming ball T on the starting opening door member 1214, the gaming ball T falls off from the starting opening door member 1214 before being guided to the second starting opening 1153, and the second starting opening 1153 It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being excessively received, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player include a plurality of obstacle nails G disposed in the game area 1100, a windmill, and a center product. By coming into contact with 1130, the winning opening unit 1150, etc., it will be distributed while moving in various directions, and the player can be entertained by making the game ball T move in various ways. In this normal state, the gaming ball T is less likely to circulate immediately below the obstacle nail G or the like on which the gaming ball T abuts, so that the gaming ball T is likely to circulate in the gaming area 1100 A (first area) and an area which is difficult to circulate are formed. Therefore, the game ball T can not be received by the second starting opening 1153 disposed below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j disposed on the downstream side according to the detection of the passed game ball T. The second starting opening upper shelf which is outside the area where the game ball T is easy to circulate and the start hole door member 1214 of the second moving forward appears in the area (first area) where the game ball T in the game area 1100 is easy to The area (second area) in which the game balls T are easily distributed is formed in the area where the game balls T on the lower side of the section 1161 j are not easily distributed. Therefore, the distribution path of the game ball T changes due to the appearance of the start opening door member 1214, and in the normal state, the game ball T can be distributed to the area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game balls T circulating in the unseen region (second region), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the player's interest.

  In addition, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is guided by the start opening door member 1214 when the start opening door member 1214 appears to be advanced, the second start opening 1153 is accepted with extremely high probability. When the game ball T is accepted to the second start opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a benefit, and a lottery of special lottery results in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, etc. are performed. Operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 can be positively performed for the player, and the player is enjoyed the operation of the game ball T to suppress the decrease in interest can do.

  Furthermore, the second starting opening 1153 where payout of the game ball T or lottery of the special lottery result is performed is arranged in a region (second region) where the game ball T is difficult to circulate when the starting opening door member 1214 is in a normal state. Therefore, even if the game ball T is hit for aiming at the second start opening 1153, the game ball T will not be accepted. Then, when the game ball T can be distributed to a region (second region) in which the game ball T is difficult to circulate, the start opening door member 1214 advances according to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134, the second start hole It becomes possible to cause the game ball T to be accepted by 1153. Therefore, even if the second start opening 1153 is opened in the game area 1100, the game ball T can not be received in the normal state, and can be received when the start opening door member 1214 does not appear (advance). Since it is impossible, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by advancing the start opening door member 1214, and it is thought that there may be something better for the player by advancing the start opening door member 1214. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is necessary to cause the game ball T to pass through the gate member 1134 in order to advance (appear) the starting opening door member 1214 to form a region (second region) in which the game ball T is easy to circulate. The player can perform a hitting operation (right hitting) of the gaming ball T aiming at the gate member 1134, and the player enjoys the hitting operation of the playing ball T and the interest is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 is moved into and out of the game area 1100 by moving in the longitudinal direction, there is no need to secure a space for inserting the starting opening door member 1214 in the gaming area 1100. The game ball T can be made as wide as possible in the game area 1100, and the movement of the game ball T becomes large by circulating the game ball T in a wide range, and the player can play the game ball T You can enjoy the movement of the to prevent the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the flat start-up opening door member 1214 (the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the longitudinal direction, when viewed from the player side, It can be made difficult to know whether the starting opening door member 1214 is advancing and appearing or is retreating and being immersed. Therefore, the appearance state of the starting opening door member 1214 can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T inserted into the game area 1100 circulates the position of the starting opening door member 1214 and abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance state, and the player enjoys the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming ball T flows down the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 is advanced and appeared, the first guide portion 1214 a of the flat starting opening door member 1214 Of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j, so that the game ball T is difficult to flow in the normal state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is inserted. The gaming ball T can be distributed to the lower side of the portion 1161j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction and made to appear in the game area 1100, and the gaming ball T is in circulation (rolling) on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214. When 1214 is retracted, or the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, the second starting opening is changed from contacting the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161 j to the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161 m while changing the second starting opening When the game ball T has flowed down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start hole 1153, since the start opening door member 1214 is elongated to the left and right. Since the retraction of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed in a very short time by the driving of the starting opening solenoid 1215, the gaming ball T reaches the right end (third guide portion 1214c) of the starting opening door member 1214 To, game ball T is that would fall from the upper starting opening the door member 1214. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 is started to be retracted, the game ball T can be prevented from being sufficiently induced, so that the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153 extra. It can control, it can control that load of the game hall which installs pachinko machine 1 increases. In addition, the game ball T can be made to feel disappointing by dropping the game ball T from the middle of the start-up opening door member 1214, so that the expectation for the next opportunity can be heightened and the player's interest is reduced can do.

Second Embodiment of the Present Invention
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like in the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment.

[1. Technical concept of the second embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
A launcher capable of launching a game medium by the operation of the player within the game area;
Pre-determination means for performing a lottery on a game when the start condition is established;
State notification means for starting variable display of symbols based on the lottery result of the prior determination means, and reporting the result of the lottery in the display mode of the symbol stopped by the establishment of the stop condition of the symbols;
Movable member control means for controlling the movement of the receiving movable member so that the game medium can pass through the specific area in a predetermined period when it is determined as a special result by the predetermination means;
A state in which the gaming media, which can pass through the specific area by the movement of the receiving movable member during the predetermined period, can benefit from passing through the specific area within a predetermined time period. Means for controlling the state of profit control;
It is determined that the ratio determined to be the special result is controlled to be a fun game state higher than the normal gaming state by the pre-judgment means, and is controlled to the advantageous profit imparting state, triggered by the termination of the advantageous profit imparting state And a good game state control means for controlling the good play state as
The game medium is displayed in the specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed by the status notification unit when the advance determination unit determines that the special result and the good gaming state are to be controlled. Fun game state continuation acquisition means that can be notified that it can be recognized that it is controlled to the above-mentioned fun game state after being controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous profit giving state when it is allowed to pass through;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine), the firing means (for example, the handle device 500) fires a gaming medium (for example, gaming ball T) into the gaming area by the operation of the player, The control board 1113) performs a lottery (for example, random number updating process in step S1) relating to the game when the start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball T is received in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153). The state notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) starts the fluctuation display of the symbol (for example, the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol by the liquid crystal display device 1115) based on the lottery result of the prior judgment means. The result of the lottery is notified in the display mode of the symbol stopped by the establishment of the stop condition of.

  The movable member control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232) receives the specific area (for example, reception) when the preliminary determination means has drawn the special result (for example, small hit). The movement of the receiving movable member (for example, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the rotating body 1236) is controlled so that the game medium can pass through the portion 1246a, V winning opening 1156) in a predetermined period, and the profit giving state control means The (main control board 1113) may provide a benefit by having the game medium, which has become able to pass the specific area by the movement of the receiving movable member during the predetermined period, passing the specific area within a predetermined time period It is controlled to an advantageous profit giving state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and good game state control means (main control board 1113) is made special result by the prior judgment means If it is determined that the case is controlled to a good gaming state (for example, a short time gaming state) higher than the normal gaming state and is controlled to the advantageous profit giving state, the good gaming state is controlled triggered by the termination of the advantageous profit giving state .

  And, when it is drawn that it is a special result and it is controlled by good game state with good game state continuation acquisition expedient (peripheral control board 1116) (for example, 2 types of big hit with a time cut out ball) Or in the case of two types of big hit when there is no time reduction), when the game medium is made to pass through the specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, it is controlled to the advantageous profit imparting state and then to the funplaying state It is possible to recognize that it will be recognized (for example, when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed, it notifies the state after the big hit game that occurs).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as one of the pachinko gaming machines, if the main digital is a specific aspect, it will be a jackpot, and a type of gaming machine (type 1 pachinko machine) in which an attacker opens and a large number of winning balls can be obtained By winning prizes at the pass gate, when the game balls are passed through a predetermined area provided at a position where the game balls can be passed by opening the prizes, a type of winning balls can be obtained. 1 type 2 type compound machine which mixes the element of the game machine (old 2 type pachinko machine) of is known.

  However, as in the above-described gaming machine, although diversification of games is attempted by using one type and two types of multi-function machines, it is no longer hoped to improve the amusement by itself alone.

  Therefore, in the present invention, when the lottery result is a special result and the lottery result is controlled to be in the good gaming state, the game medium is passed to the specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is made to be controlled, it is controlled to be in the advantageous profit imparting state, and then it is added to the new game property that it is notified that it is controlled to be controlled to the good gaming state.

  In the second embodiment of the present invention, during a small hit game, if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, this occurs. A case will be described where it is suggested to the player whether the gaming state after the big hit game is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  In other words, the game ball received by the receiving portion 1236a by sliding of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 during a small hit, the rotating body 1236 is rotated (Figure 124 (b) from the upward position shown in Figure 124 (a) The case of suggesting whether or not the two types of jackpots that are generated if they are accepted to the V winning opening 1156 by rotating to the right facing position shown in FIG.

[2. Processing by peripheral control board]
Next, processing by the peripheral control board 1116 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. FIG. The process by the peripheral control board 1116 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 144 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed by the main control board 1113 described above.

[2-1. Effect control processing by peripheral control board]
First, the effect control process executed on the peripheral control board 1116 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. FIG. First, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether the hold command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S100). If the peripheral control board 116 determines that the hold command has not been received (step S100: NO), the process moves on to step S103.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the periphery control board 1116 receives the suspension command (step S100: YES), the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM (not shown) of the periphery control substrate 1116 Is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S101), and the hold display image (an image showing that the first special symbol determination is held) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is updated (step S102).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether a gaming state command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S103). When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the gaming state command has been received (step S103: YES), based on the information included in the received gaming state command, the game is played in the time saving game state after the big hit game is over. It is determined whether it is controlled (step S104).

  When it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the gaming state command from the main control board 1113 (step S103: NO), it is determined that the game is not controlled in the time saving game state after the big hit game is over. (Step S104: NO), the process moves to Step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is controlled in the short time game state (step S104: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 is generated when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. After the jackpot game, an advantageous suggestion effect process of suggesting by means of the liquid crystal display device 1115 whether to shift to a time saving game is executed (step S105).

  Here, “advantage suggestive effect” means that when the lottery result is a small hit during the short time game, the game ball T is put on the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed (during the variation of the symbol) It is an effect to inform that it can be recognized that the gaming state is controlled to the short time gaming state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state when passing. More specifically, if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when a small hit occurs during a short time game, a big hit game It is suggested to the player whether the gaming state after is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  Specifically, during the time saving game, the effect image of the light off lamp is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, it occurs after the big hit game When the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 is changed by changing the effect image of the lighted off lamp for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) to the effect image of the lit lamp. If the game state after the big hit game that would occur if is accepted is the normal game state or if it is a short time game state, that is, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 The player is notified at each small hit whether or not there is a time saving game. As described above, by notifying with the effect image of the lamp, the player can grasp at a glance whether or not there is a time-saving game at the big hit within the limited time (within the variation time).

  In addition, although the case where the effect image of a lamp is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is demonstrated below, even if it alert | reports by turning on or off the lamp | ramp (lamp provided in the pachinko machine 1) of the real thing which does not use an image. Good. In addition, the notification of whether or not there is a time-saving game at the big hit is not limited to the effect image of the lamp. In addition, the display of the lighting effect image of the lamp can be made clear to the player by setting from the start of the change to the end of the change.

  Furthermore, it can also be from the start of the change until the prize winning opening 1155 is closed by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. In addition, the lighting effect image of the lamp may be displayed temporarily (a time that can be recognized by the player at first glance) between the start of the change and the end of the change. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the lighting effect of the lamp is made, and it is possible to further concentrate on the game and to improve the interest in the game.

  As described above, in order to notify the presence or absence of time saving by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player continuously obtains an advantageous state (time saving big hit) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible.

  In other words, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that is generated when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is a time saving gaming state, by the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 Since the game ball can be made to be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the typing operation at the same time when the prize item winning opening 1155 is opened, the player can continue to obtain a big hit of time saving with himself. .

  It should be noted that although the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball can not be received in the V winning hole 1156, or time-saving big hit is obtained by the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning hole 1156. If it is not possible to play a game, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the game state is not a normal game state and a big hit game state and a short time game state are repeated, the time hit is a big hit every small hit Informing whether there is or not (Advantage suggestion effect is executed even during the short time game later).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is being executed (step S106). Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control board 1113. Then, based on whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed since the fluctuation start command was received, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  When it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is not in the middle of executing the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol (step S106: NO), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 1113 (Step S107). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the change start command has not been received (step S107: NO), the process moves on to step S127.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the fluctuation start command has been received (step S107: YES), the fluctuation control command is analyzed (step S108).

  In this variation start command, as described above, the setting information of the judgment symbol indicating the judgment result of the big hit judgment processing, whether this setting information relates to the first special symbol judgment or the second special symbol judgment It includes information indicating whether it is a thing, setting information indicating which of a reach effect and a no reach effect, setting information of a fluctuation pattern, and information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the change start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination are specified, and it is determined which of the reach effect and the reach no effect needs to be performed, and the change time in which the special symbol is variably displayed It is possible to identify the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, based on the analysis result, the peripheral control board 1116 executes a variation effect pattern selection process (step S109).

  Specifically, in the sub ROM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, a big hit effect table, a lost reach with effect table, a lost reach with no effect table, and a small hit effect table with respect to fluctuation effects accompanying the fluctuation display of special symbols At least four effect tables of the table are stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to fluctuation patterns (variation time) determined in the main control board 1113.

  The peripheral control board 1116 selects one of the plurality of tables based on setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “lost”, information indicating that “no reach effect” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that “variation time” of the special symbol is 12 seconds, The peripheral control board 1116 selects a no reach reach effect table for 12 seconds. At that time, based on the setting information included in the change start command, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, and an effect table (not shown) according to the gaming state Choose

  The effect random number and the effect pattern are associated with the effect table described above. The peripheral control board 1116 updates the effect random number every time the random number update process described above is performed, acquires the value at the time of receiving the change start command, and obtains a large number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. Among them, one effect pattern is determined by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  Thus, by performing the variation production pattern determination process, the mode of each of the effects constituting the variation presentation such as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the presence or absence of the reach presentation, the presence or absence of the presentation button presentation, and the type of the background image is determined. Ru.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 starts the change effect of the change effect pattern determined in the process of step S109 (step S110). As a result, the fluctuation effect in which the effect pattern is determined in the effect control board 130 is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1115 side speaker 130 or the like.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 updates the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S111). The process of step S111 is performed when the variation display of the special symbol at this time relates to the first special symbol determination, and is not performed when the variation display of the current special symbol relates to the second special symbol determination.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the short time gaming state based on the setting information included in the change start command determined to be received in the process of step S107 ( Step S112). When it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is not in the time saving game state (step S112: NO), the processing is shifted to step S127.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is in the time saving game state (step S112: YES), the variation start command is the second based on the information included in the variation start command received this time. It is determined whether it is a thing related to special symbol determination (step S113).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the fluctuation effect finished this time is not the fluctuation effect relating to the second special symbol determination (step S113: NO), that is, it is a fluctuation start command relating to the first special symbol determination Based on the setting information of the determination symbol included in the change start command, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination of this time is "big hit" (step S114).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a specific big hit (step S114: NO), it transfers the process to step S127.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a specific big hit (step S114: YES), the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM is "ON". (Step S115). The hit notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that it is a big hit (one big hit or two big hits) in the notification effect that is advanced along with the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the short time game state is there. In this hit notification flag, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", or the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the game ball is in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game Set to "ON" when winning a prize. When the peripheral control board 1116 sets the hit notification flag to "ON", the process proceeds to step S127.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is the change start command according to the second special symbol determination (step S113: YES), based on the setting information of the determination symbol included in the change start command. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol determination of this time is "small hit" (step S117).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S117: YES), it executes the advantageous suggestion effect processing (step S119). That is, as in the process of step S105, before the liquid crystal display device 1115 displays the determination result of the second special symbol determination, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the game after the big hit game that occurs An effect is executed to indicate to the player whether the state is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state. When the peripheral control board 1116 executes the advantageous suggestion effect process, the process moves to step S127.

  It should be noted that although the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball can not be received in the V winning hole 1156, or time-saving big hit is obtained by the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning hole 1156. If it is not possible to play a game, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the game state is not a normal game state and a big hit game state and a short time game state are repeated, the time hit is a big hit every small hit Informing whether there is or not (Advantage suggestion effect is executed even during the short time game later).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not "small hit" (step S117: NO), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit" It is determined whether there is any (step S118).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit" (step S118: YES), it transfers the process to the above-mentioned step S115 in order to notify "big hit". On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "losing" (step S118: NO), it is determined whether or not the start command relating to the big hit game is received from the main control board 1113 (Step S127). If it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the start command relating to the big hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S127: NO), the process moves on to step S133.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 receives the start command related to the big hit game (step S127: YES), whether or not the hit notification flag is set to "ON" by the process of step S115. It determines (step S128). When it is determined that the hit notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S128: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start a predetermined start effect (step S129).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit notification flag is set to "ON" (step S128: YES), the periphery control board 1116 sends a "big hit" notification to the liquid crystal display device 1115 as the start effect. It is started (step S130), and the hit notification flag is set to "OFF" (step S131).

  The peripheral control board 1116 determines whether a round start command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S133). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the round start command has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S133: NO), the process moves on to step S135.

  On the other hand, if the periphery control board 1116 determines that the round start command has been received (step S133: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start rendering during the round (step S134). As a result, the current number of rounds and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 are updated.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether an end command relating to the big hit game has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S135). If it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the end command relating to the big hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S135: NO), the process moves on to step S139.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 receives the end command related to the big hit game (step S135: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start predetermined end effect (step S136).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the start command relating to the small hit game has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S139). If it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the start command relating to the small hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S139: NO), the process moves on to step S141.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 receives the start command relating to the small hit game (step S139: YES), the small hit flag stored in the sub RAM is set to “ON” ( Step S140). The small hit flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game in which the game ball can be received to the V winning hole 1156 by sliding the prize winning hole opening / closing member 1221 is in the main control board 1113. From when the start command relating to the small hit game is received, it is set to "ON", and when the end command related to the small hit game is received, it is set to "OFF".

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S 141). When the peripheral control board 1118 determines that the small hitting middle flag is not set to “ON” (step S141: NO), the peripheral control board 1118 shifts the processing to step S144.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S 141: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the V winning command is received from the main control board 1113. (Step S142). That is, whether or not the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a by the slide of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit game is accepted by the V winning opening 1156 by the rotation of the rotating body 1236 Determine.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the V prize command has not been received from the main control board 1113 (step S142: NO), the process proceeds to step S144 while the V prize command is received from the main control board 1113. If it is determined that it has been received (step S142: YES), the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM is set to "ON" (step S143).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether an end command related to the small hit game has been received (step S144). When it is determined that the peripheral control board 166 has not received the end command relating to the small hit game (step S144: NO), the effect control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 receives the end command related to the small hit game (step S144: YES), the small hit flag is set to “OFF” (step S145).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether the hit notification flag is set to "ON" (step S146). When it is determined that the hit notification flag is set to “ON” (step S146: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit notification flag is not set to "ON" (step S146: NO), the periphery control board 1116 starts an effect of reporting a loss (step S147). That is, since the game ball is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, when the small hit game is ended, the liquid crystal display device 1115 starts an effect of informing “losing”.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 sets the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM to "OFF" (step S148). The peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process when the hit notification flag is set to “OFF”.

  As described above, the main control board 1113 receives an opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the winning combination opening 1155 determined based on the small hit symbol random number. For this reason, in the above-described advantageous suggestion rendering process of step S105 and step S119, the opening timing of the winning combination prize opening 1155 may be notified based on the opening and closing pattern. By notifying the opening timing of the prize winning opening 1155 as described above, the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened can be made to be easy to perform the driving operation.

Third Embodiment of the Present Invention
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like in the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration is omitted. Do. Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment.

[1. Technical thought of the third embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Lottery means for performing a lottery by having a lottery condition established,
State notification means for notifying that a game relating to a lottery by the lottery means is in progress by variably displaying a symbol, and notifying that the game is over by stopping the symbol to be displayed;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the movement of the receiving movable member is controlled to make it impossible or difficult to pass the game medium to the specific area provided at the position related to the receiving movable member. Movable member control means capable of controlling from the first state to the second state in which passage to the specific region is easier than the first state;
Profit giving means for giving a profit by having a game medium pass through the specific area;
When the lottery result is a high identification result that can be controlled to a high profit gaming state in which the ratio of the identification result is higher than normal, control to the high profit gaming state is triggered by the end of the provision of the profit. High profit gaming state giving means which can
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, after the giving of the profit is finished, it can be presented whether it can be controlled to the high profit state or not Profit presentation means,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the lottery means (main control board 1113) is that the lottery conditions are satisfied (for example, the game ball T is received in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153 At the moment, a lottery is made, and the status notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) notifies that the game about the lottery by the lottery means is in progress by fluctuating display of the symbol, the game Is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped and displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1115).

  The movable member control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232) is a receiving movable member (for example, the prize winning opening opening / closing member) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result. 1221, the rotation of the rotating body 1236) to control the movement of the game medium (for example, the game ball T) to a specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, V winning opening 1156) provided at the position related to the receiving movable member Control from the first state where it is impossible or difficult to pass to the second state where passage to the specific area is easier than in the first state (for example, the state in which the receiving part 1246a is closed by the slide of the prize hole opening and closing member 1221 , The profit giving means (main control board 1113) gives a profit (for example, a big hit) by the game medium passing through the specific area, The profit gaming state giving means (main control board 1113) can be controlled to a high profit gaming state (for example, a time saving gaming state) in which the ratio of the lottery result to a specific result (for example, small hit) is higher than usual. If so, the game is controlled to the high profit gaming state triggered by the end of the giving of the profit.

  Then, the high profit presentation means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the symbol is displayed 1000 times and stopped continuously during the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state, etc.) Before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the status notification means, after the end of the profit giving (for example, after the big hit game is over) is controlled to the high profit state (for example, time saving game state (For example, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state after the big hit game that occurs will be reported).

  As a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed based on the game ball having won in the starting opening (for example, the first starting opening and the second starting opening), and when winning is selected, if specific conditions are met after winning There is a pachinko machine that gives an advantageous profit according to the lottery result. In such a pachinko machine, the degree of advantage of the profit to be given is made different depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, in order to improve the game entertainment.

  However, since the gaming machine which makes the degree of advantage of the profit to be varied differs depending on whether or not a specific condition such as the above-mentioned gaming machine is satisfied, it is not already new, so it satisfies the player seeking further amusement It is getting harder to

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when a predetermined condition is established, the lottery result becomes the specific result after the end of the provision of the profit by the game medium having passed the specific area before the game is started and the symbols are stopped and displayed. It presents discriminatively whether the proportion is controlled to a high profit state higher than normal.

  In this case, it is assumed that "predetermined condition is satisfied", the lottery result will be displayed by stopping the decorative symbol 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously in the normal gaming state without becoming a big hit gaming state below. The case where is displayed will be described. Specifically, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the state of variable display of the symbol is made 1000 times without becoming the big hit gaming state, that is, the so-called stuck state.

  Also, "a specific area provided at a position related to the receiving movable member" means that the gaming ball can be received to the specific area when the gaming medium is received by the receiving movable member, The receiving movable member and the specific area may or may not be a unit. In addition, even if the specific area is not provided at a position near the receiving movable member, the gaming ball moves so that the gaming ball can be received to the specific area when the gaming medium is received by the receiving movable member. For example, the receiving movable member and the specific region may be provided at a distance from each other. That is, the receiving movable member and the specific area may have a structure in which the game medium movably received by the receiving movable member can be received into the specific area.

  Furthermore, “the first state in which the passage of game media is impossible or difficult” means that the passage of game media to the specific area is impossible or the passage of game media to the specific area is easy. It means that gaming media are less likely to pass than the status, but there is a possibility of passing infrequently.

  In the third embodiment of the present invention, the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game when the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches 1000 times without becoming the big hit game state during the normal game. Before the judgment result (lottery result) of the judgment is displayed, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the game state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal game state or in the time-saving game state The case of suggesting to the player whether it is present will be described.

  That is, when the number of times the symbol display is stopped on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 1000 times during the normal gaming state without becoming a big hit gaming state, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides during a small hit and received If the game ball received by unit 1236a is received by V winning opening 1156 by rotation of rotating body 1236 (rotation from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). A case will be described which suggests whether or not the two types of jackpots that occur are time-losing jackpots.

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the third embodiment of the present invention executes substantially the same processing as the processing by the main control substrate and the processing by the peripheral control substrate of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state is not changed to the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116. Are stored cumulatively, and the advantageous suggestion effect is executed when the stored number of times (cumulative fluctuation number) reaches a predetermined number (1000 times in this embodiment).

  Specifically, based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the normal gaming state, the number of times the decorative symbol is changed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (cumulative change number) is calculated as the peripheral control board 1116 Count in RAM.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM is 1,000 or more. It is determined whether or not.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of changes is 1000 or more, it executes the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of times of change is 1000 times or more, the effect image of the light-extinguished lamp is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the time saving game (not shown). And, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is a short time game state, the effect image of the lamp that is lighting the effect image of this off lamp If the game ball T is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 by changing to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time saving state That is, if the game ball is received in the V winning hole 1156, the player is notified at every small hit whether or not there is time reduction in the generated big hit.

  It should be noted that although the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball can not be received in the V winning hole 1156, or time-saving big hit is obtained by the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning hole 1156. If it is not possible to play a game, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the game state is not a normal game state and a big hit game state and a short time game state are repeated, the time hit is a big hit every small hit Informing whether there is or not (Advantage suggestion effect is executed even during the short time game later).

  Then, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the peripheral control board 1116 clears the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM. In addition, by setting it as the structure which backs up the cumulative fluctuation frequency, even if it is a case where a power supply is interrupted | blocked, the cumulative fluctuation frequency can be counted continuously.

  Thus, in order to notify the presence or absence of time saving by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player continues the advantageous state (big hit with time saving) depending on the slide timing of the winning feature opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible to obtain.

  In other words, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that is generated when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is a time saving gaming state, by the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 Since the game ball can be made to be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the hitting operation in synchronization with the opening timing of the prize winning opening 1155, it is possible for the player to continuously obtain a jackpot with time saving by himself. .

  In addition, during the normal gaming state, when it is determined that the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 without becoming the big hit gaming state is 1000 times or more, the advantage suggestion effect is executed Therefore, it is possible to save the progress of the game for a long time in the gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

  That is, it is disadvantageous for the player if a long-term game is played in the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state. However, even if the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous continues for a long time, if the game state is changed from the big hit game state to the short time game state thereafter, the player continues the big hit of time reduction by executing the advantage suggestion effect. It is possible to make the game advantageous by gaining.

  In addition, even if the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player continues, it may change from the big hit gaming state to the short time gaming state thereafter, and may be able to continuously obtain the big hit of the short time by executing the advantage suggestion effect. Since the sense of expectation can be given, the sense of expectation can be improved despite the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed during the normal gaming state is approximately 1000 (for example, 800 times or 900 times or more) without becoming the big hit gaming state, the game Even in the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the cumulative number of times of change is 1000 and it is possible to make a surprise for whether or not the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, displaying the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state, in the area other than the area where the liquid crystal display device 1115 displays the symbol. Thus, it is possible to clearly grasp the cumulative number of changes while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result (not shown).

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state as “the predetermined condition is established”. As described above, when the stop display is performed 1000 times without becoming the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, it is possible to assume that the predetermined condition described above is satisfied.

  Further, although the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 has been described continuously during the normal gaming state, the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short time gaming state and the normal gaming state. It can be assumed that the symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the short time gaming state after the big hit gaming state, when the number of times the stop display is performed during the short time gaming state and the normal gaming state reaches 1000 times, the small hit gaming state Perform an advantage suggestive production.

  Furthermore, although the case where the display is stopped 1000 times has been described, the present invention is not limited to 1000 times. However, it is desirable to set the number of times 500, 1000, 1500, etc. that the player can easily remember as the number of times the advantage suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, the number of times of stop display can be randomly determined from among a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, one out of 500 times, 1000 times and 1500 times is randomly determined. In addition, the determination of the number is triggered by the fact that the game ball T is accepted in the first start port 1152 (which may be the second start port 1153) during the normal game state after the time saving game state ends and the normal game state is established. You may decide to By randomly determining the number of times in this manner, diversification of games can be achieved.

  When the number is randomly determined as described above, the determined number may be notified to the player. In this way, by notifying the determined number of times, for example, when 500 times out of 500 times, 1000 times and 1500 times are determined, it may make the player think that it is lucky today. Because it can, it can improve the sense of expectation for the game.

  If the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state reaches 600 times and the big hit gaming state is established, for example, when not notifying the number of times determined to the player The player can be excited until the time-saving gaming state is reached (500 until the advantage suggestion effect is executed) if the number of times performed is 500 times or 1000 times.

  Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not to report the presence or absence of time saving by lottery performed every predetermined number of times of fluctuation (for example, 500 times). Then, for example, when it is determined that the number of fluctuations is 500 and it is determined to notify the presence or absence of time saving, it is not necessary to execute a lottery whether or not to notify every frequency of fluctuation thereafter. And, when it is decided to notify, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation to the time-saving gaming state by notifying before the time-saving gaming state.

  In addition, the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is a multiple of the average number of times of variation display in which the variation display is performed with the gaming ball lent for 1000 yen (for example, the game lent out for 1000 yen) By changing the average number of times of fluctuation display to 20 times × 25 = 500 times and the average number of times of fluctuation 20 times × 50 = 1000 times), it will be in a big hit gaming state if you continue playing a little more By making the player think that the advantage suggestion effect may be executed in the short time game state, it is possible to improve the will to continue the game.

  In the above case, since there are gaming machines having different game ball charges in recent years, in the case of 4 yen per game ball, the average number of times the variable display is performed with the game ball being lent out for 1000 yen In the case of 1 yen per game ball 20 times, it can be a multiple of 40 which is an average number of times of variable display in which variable display is performed with a game ball lent out for 1000 yen.

  In addition, it is possible to decide with the game ball which is lent out when the rental ball button 361 which starts the lending of the game ball from the ball lending machine is operated once. That is, in the case of 4 yen per game ball, the game ball for 500 yen is lent out in one operation, and 10 times which is the average number of times of variable display in which fluctuation display is performed with the lent game ball, In the case of 1 yen per game ball, a game ball for 200 yen is lent out in one operation, and a multiple of 16 which is an average number of times of variable display in which fluctuation display is performed with the lent game ball can do.

  Further, assuming that "a predetermined condition is established", for example, when a small hit is provided even in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the predetermined condition is met when the small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. it can. The number of small hits may be determined randomly as in the case of randomly determining the number of changes described above.

  In the third embodiment of the present invention, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the so-called lumped state is established as "the predetermined condition is established", but a specific symbol (for example, "7") If the big hit in the symbol pattern), the big hit in a specific reach, and a big hit in the case of displaying a predetermined number of reach, execute the advantage suggestion effect during the short time gaming state at a later time May be In this case, it is possible to improve the expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today.

  In addition, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect may be made different depending on "the predetermined condition is established". Specifically, if the number of times the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state is 200 times or less, it is informed whether or not it is a big hit with a short time during the short time gaming state, 201 If the number of times is 500 or less and the time saving game is 20 times, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is started. If the number of times is 501 or more, the advantage suggestion effect is always executed during the time saving game state. As described above, by making the execution of the advantage suggestion effect different depending on the condition in the normal gaming state, it is possible to change the type of relief depending on the so-called jammed condition in the normal gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the so-called stuck state is established as "the predetermined condition is satisfied" has been described, but a predetermined time (for example, 90 minutes) The advantage suggestion effect may be executed when the game is continued. That is, it may be determined whether or not the game is continued for a predetermined period of time based on a time (timer).

  In the case of executing advantage suggestion effect when continuing the game for a predetermined time as described above, the game ball T is not received for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in the first start opening 1152 during the normal game In the case where the handle device 500 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes), a sensor or the like does not detect a player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), etc. When it is determined that the player is not playing a game, the time (timer) is reset, and when the game is played again, the time is newly counted.

  It should be noted that the lottery result is displayed by displaying 1000 decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously as "predetermined conditions are satisfied" and continuing in the normal gaming state without becoming a big hit gaming state Although the case has been described, the lottery result may be indicated 1000 times by the special symbol or the normal symbol on the function display 1114, or the lottery regarding the game is performed 1000 times without becoming the big hit gaming state It may be

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to inform only the player who has continued the game for a long time whether or not it is a time-saving big hit by the advantage suggestion effect. For this reason, it is possible to relieve only the player who is in a so-called stuck state. In addition, the player who plays the pachinko machine 1 can improve the operation rate because it tries to continue the game for a long time.

(Characteristic effects of the second and third embodiments of the present invention)
The second embodiment and the third embodiment of the present invention described above have the same effects as the effects according to the first embodiment of the present invention, but also have the following effects.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, even before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short time game, if the gaming ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect By providing a pachinko machine to which a new game characteristic is added to suggest the gaming state after the end of the big hit game that occurs to the player, the player is satisfied and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

  In other words, during the time saving game, to inform the gaming state after the end of the big hit game that occurs when the gaming ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, before the liquid crystal display device 1115 shows the lottery result, Based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the gaming ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the short time gaming state, the player is the winning hole 1155 by the bonus opening and closing member 1221 The game ball can be made to be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 by performing the hitting operation in accordance with the timing of opening. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest by realizing the novel game characteristic that the player can continuously obtain the jackpot with time reduction by himself.

  In particular, before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, that is, by performing the advantage suggestion effect while the decorative symbol is changing in the liquid crystal display device 1115, the prize winning opening It is possible to secure a time for performing the driving operation in accordance with the timing at which the 1155 is released.

  Furthermore, the effect image of the lighted off lamp is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the gaming ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time saving gaming state In this case, the presence or absence of the short time is notified by changing the effect image of the light-off lamp to the effect image of the light-on lamp. Since the player can recognize the presence or absence of the time saving at a glance by notifying the lamp with the light off or on in this manner, providing many players with a useful opportunity to continue the big hit of the time saving. Can.

  In addition, the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and during the short time game, the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the gaming ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is In order to inform each small hit whether or not it is a time-saving gaming state, it is possible to give the player a chance of winning a time-saving big hit every time the lottery result becomes a time-saving 2 types of big hit (see FIG. 126).

  As described above, in order to execute the advantage suggestion effect before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the player secures time to prepare for the big hit game of the time saving be able to. That is, when the player is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short-time gaming state by the advantageous suggestion effect, the strike operation actively aimed to pass the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 I do. However, for example, when there is no game ball T to shoot at V winning opening 1156 (when there is no game ball T on upper plate 301), the time for lending game ball T (adjacent to pachinko machine 1) Since it is necessary to insert cash or a prepaid card into the provided ball lending machine and press the rental ball button 361), the advantage indicating effect is executed after the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. And, there is a risk of missing the chance of getting a big hit with a short time.

  However, by executing the advantage suggestion effect before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the player can prepare the game ball T etc. in advance so as not to miss the chance of winning the time-saving big hit. it can. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the chance of winning the time-saving jackpot from being missed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the operation rate by preparing not to miss the chance of winning the time-out jackpot. .

  Then, in order to notify the presence or absence of time saving by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player may continue to obtain an advantageous state (time saving with big hit) depending on the slide timing of the winning feature opening and closing member 1221. It becomes possible.

  Also, although the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball T can not be received in the V prize hole 1156, or the time winning short jackpot is obtained by the timing when the game ball is received in the V prize hole 1156 If it can not be played, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when it is in the normal gaming state, but if it is repeating the big hit gaming state and the time saving gaming state without becoming the normal gaming state Informs whether there is or not (performs an advantage suggestive effect even during a short time game later on). As a result, it is possible to continue the time-saving big hit, and it is possible to provide many players with useful opportunities.

  Furthermore, if the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player because the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. It can be a relief for long-running games in the gaming state.

  In addition, since it is possible to save the progress of the game for a long time in the game state which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped because the normal game state lasts for a long time. Operation rate can be improved.

  Furthermore, even though the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball can not be received in the V winning hole 1156, or time-saving big hit is obtained by the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning hole 1156. If it is not possible to play a game, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the game state is not a normal game state and a big hit game state and a short time game state are repeated, the time hit is a big hit every small hit Informing whether there is or not (Advantage suggestion effect is executed even during the short time game later). As a result, it is possible to continue the time-saving big hit, and it is possible to provide many players with useful opportunities.

  In addition, even if the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player continues, it may change from the big hit gaming state to the short time gaming state thereafter, and may be able to continuously obtain the big hit of the short time by executing the advantage suggestion effect. Since the sense of expectation can be given, the sense of expectation can be improved despite the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed during the normal gaming state is approximately 1000 (for example, 800 times or 900 times or more) without becoming the big hit gaming state, the game Even in the normal gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the cumulative number of times of change is 1000 and it is possible to make a surprise for whether or not the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, displaying the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state, in a region other than the region for displaying the decorative symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1115 Thus, the player can clearly grasp the cumulative number of changes while paying attention to the decorative symbol indicating the lottery result.

  Then, as in the case where the "predetermined condition is established", the liquid crystal display device 1115 continues to display the lottery result 1000 times without displaying the big hit game state and the normal game state continues. By making the case where the condition that the player does not intend (the player can not get involved) satisfied, it is possible to make the game more exciting and to enhance interest.

(Other Embodiments of the First to Third Embodiments of the Present Invention)
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like of the other embodiments of the first to third embodiments of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments of the present invention, the description of the same configuration is omitted. I assume.

[1. Aspect of rotation of rotating body]
In the embodiment described above, the prize winning opening 1155 is performed by rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b). Although the case where the gaming ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a becomes acceptable to the V winning opening 1156 is described, the other rotation modes can be adopted.

  Specifically, the rotating body 1236 stands by at the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) when a predetermined condition is met. The game ball T can be made available to the unit 1236a. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small hit symbol random number allows the receiving unit 1236 a to make the player harassing or pounding as to whether or not the game ball T can be received. It is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T and improve the interest of the player.

[2. Suggestion aspect by advantage suggestion production]
In the embodiment described above, the effect image of the lamp being turned off is always displayed (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short time game as an advantage suggestion effect, and if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 In the case where the game state after the big hit game to be played is the short time game state, the case of notifying the presence or absence of the time reduction by changing the effect image of the lighted lamp to the effect image of the lit lamp has been described. , And other aspects are possible.

  Specifically, when a small hit occurs during a short time game, the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after a big hit game that occurs Whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state can be displayed in characters, such as "There is a time reduction!" Or "No time reduction!". As described above, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of time saving by displaying in characters.

  Further, by making the color of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in V winning opening 1156 is a short time gaming state, the decorative symbol is displayed in rainbow color, etc., which is different from a normal decorative symbol By displaying in color, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving while paying attention to the variation of the decorative symbol.

  Furthermore, by making the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal game state, the cat character is displayed, and the game state after the big hit game is short By displaying the dog character when in the game state, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time saving while making the effect mode diverse.

  In addition, by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 which can be pressed by the player, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state, the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates, the gaming state after the big hit gaming is the normal game When the player is in the time-saving gaming state more strongly than in the state, the player vibrates or vibrates more strongly, thereby suppressing the player's action such as tapping on the glass unit 590.

  That is, when notifying the presence or absence of shortness by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand to hit the gaming ball T into the gaming area 1100, and the left hand pressing operation unit Since the user touches 405, both hands are closed. In this state, it is difficult to act like hitting the glass unit 590 to put the game ball in the prize winning opening 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning opening 1156, so that the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being damaged or the like. can do.

  In addition to the vibration, even if the presence or absence of time saving is notified by air from the pressing operation unit 405, the above-described effects can be obtained.

[3. Continuation of advantageous suggestion production]
In the embodiment described above, although the advantage suggestion effect is being executed, the game ball T can not be received in the V winning opening 1156, or time is reduced by the timing at which the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 Even in the normal gaming state when it is not possible to get a big hit, it has been described that the advantageous suggestion effect is executed when it is a short game state in the subsequent games, but the advantageous suggestion is given according to predetermined conditions It may be determined whether or not to perform the effect.

  Specifically, it is possible to execute the advantage suggestion effect only during the short time game pertaining to the first hit, and not to execute the advantage suggestion effect when becoming a time short game state in the subsequent games. In addition, if you meet the predetermined conditions at the time of the first hit (if it becomes a big hit with a specific symbol, if it becomes a big hit with a specific random number, etc. if it becomes a big hit with a specific reach, etc.) When it becomes a short time game state in, may be executed advantage suggestion effect. By executing the advantage suggestion effect as described above, the expectation for the first hit can be improved, and a pachinko machine to which new game characteristics are added can be provided.

  In addition, it is possible to change the execution mode of the advantage suggestion effect in the subsequent game depending on the number of changes in the normal gaming state before becoming a time-saving and big-hit game. For example, if the number of fluctuations during the normal gaming state before becoming a time-saving big-hit game is 200 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only during the time-shorting game pertaining to the first hit, and the time-saving gaming state in the subsequent games If it does not, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, but if the number of changes in the normal gaming state is 1,000, the advantage suggestion effect is executed also when the time saving game state is entered in the subsequent games. It can be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to save for long-term progression of the game in a gaming state more disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, it is possible to change the number of executions of the advantage suggestion effect in the subsequent games, depending on the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state before becoming a time-saving and big-hit game. For example, if the number of fluctuations during the normal gaming state before becoming a time-saving big-hit game is 200, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only twice including the time-shortening game pertaining to the first hit, and the third and subsequent games When it becomes a time-saving game state, does not execute the advantage suggestion effect, but when the number of changes in the normal game state is 1000 times, the advantage suggestion effect is limited to 7 times including the time-short game pertaining to the first hit. If it is executed and the short time gaming state is reached in the eighth and subsequent games, it can be configured not to execute the advantage suggestion effect. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case of executing the advantage suggestion effect only for 7 times including the short time game pertaining to the first hit, it becomes a big hit with no time reduction during the second time short game, and the normal gaming state after the big hit game Even if it becomes, if it becomes a big hit with a time cut, the advantage suggestion production is executed, and the player can have expectation feeling that it may be obtained continuously with a big hit with a short cut, and the operation rate is improved. It can be done.

[4. Suggested timing of advantageous suggestion production]
In the embodiment described above, by always displaying the effect image of the lamp being turned off on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game, if the gaming ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, it occurs after the big hit game A description will be given of the case where the gaming state is always notified (informing every small hit), but there may be provided a case of notifying and not notifying (a case of performing an advantage suggestion effect and a case of not performing).

  Specifically, by providing a period that is easy to be notified during the time saving game and a period that is difficult to be notified (a game period that is always notified and a game period that is not always notified may be used), new game characteristics can be added. . For example, during 100 short time games, 1 game to 20 games are easily notified, 40 games from 21 games are hard to be notified, 60 games from 41 games are easy to be notified, 80 games from 61 games are hard to be notified, 81 games From 100 games are easy to be informed. By setting the period in this way, the sense of expectation can be improved with respect to the period when it is easy to be informed, and by suppressing the operation of striking by the player, it is possible to dramatically suppress the decrease in interest during time saving. Can.

  In addition, it is easy to be notified when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the time of the first hit (when the big hit with a specific symbol, the big hit with a specific random number, the big hit with a specific reach, etc.) When the predetermined condition is not satisfied at the time of the first hit, the period can be made shorter than in the case of satisfying the predetermined condition at the time of the first hit. By setting the period in this way, the sense of expectation can be improved for the first hit.

  Further, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only in the case of the change in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only when the small random access symbol random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number (when it is a specific symbol). As described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the small hit design random number is a specific random number, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the specific design.

  Furthermore, an advantage suggestive effect may be always executed during a later time if the small random access symbol random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number. Further, when the small hit design random number is a specific random number, the advantage suggestion effect may be executed only for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 20 games) after that. Furthermore, when the advantage suggestion effect is always executed in the later time and the advantage suggestion effect is always executed only in a predetermined time period thereafter, the symbol random number for small hit may include a variation which is a specific random number The small hit design random number may not include the variation which is a specific random number, and may be set to a predetermined short time or a later time. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for execution in the advantage suggestion effect.

Fourth Embodiment of the Present Invention
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like in the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration will be omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical thought of the fourth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea 1.
Operation means operable by the player;
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning the game;
Passage control means capable of controlling a passage permitted state in which game media can be passed to a specific area based on the result of the drawing by the drawing means;
Profit giving control means for controlling a profit giving state when game media passes through the specific area;
Normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery after the profit provision state ends when passing the game medium to the specific area;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means, the game is more advantageous than the normal state after the profit provision state is finished despite the fact that the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium passes through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notification obtaining means capable of increasing a ratio controlled to a gaming state.

  The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1) is operable by the player for the operation means (for example, the handle device 500), and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113) performs lottery for the game (for example, When the gaming ball T is received in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153, a lottery is performed).

  In addition, the passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113), based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the game medium (for example, game ball T) in a specific area (for example, receiving unit 1246a, V winning opening 1156) The passable state is controlled to be permitted, and the profit giving control means (for example, the main control board 1113) is controlled to the profit giving state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the game state to the big hit gaming state) When the game medium is passed through the specific area, the normal acquisition means (for example, the main control board 11113) is more advantageous than the normal state and the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery after the profit giving state ends. Control to an advantageous state (for example, control to a normal gaming state or a time saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game).

  Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means, the notification obtaining means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116), even though the predetermined ratio is the same when passing the game medium to the specific area, It is possible to increase the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is controlled more than the normal state after the end of the profit giving state (for example, by advancing the game so that the player does not receive the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the time saving game, If the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 when the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the short time game reaches 80 times without becoming the big hit game state, in order to report the state after the big hit game which occurs if the game ball is accepted The percentage you can earn is higher.

  As a conventional game machine, it is advantageous for the player if the game ball passes through the area of the benefit by opening one kind of pachinko machine and the movable piece etc. which shifts to the game state advantageous to the player when the main digital becomes a specific aspect. There is known a 1 type 2 type composite machine in which two elements of an old 2 type pachinko machine which is shifted to the gaming state are mixed.

  However, since the above-mentioned type 1 two-type compound machine is no longer new, it is becoming difficult to satisfy the player who seeks more fun of the game.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means operable by the player, the game medium is controlled to a more advantageous gaming state than the normal state after the end of the profit giving state. To achieve a novel gameplay that can increase the rate of

  In the following, assuming that the "predetermined condition is satisfied" by the operation of the operation means, the player is not allowed to receive the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the time saving game by the hit operation by the handle device 500 as the operation means. A case where the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time saving game reaches 80 times without becoming the big hit game state by having advanced the game will be described.

  And, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time saving game is 80 without becoming the big hit gaming state by the player's operation of the game ball T by operating the handle device 500. If it reaches, during the small hit game, before the decision result of the 2nd special symbol decision (drawing result) is indicated in liquid crystal display 1115, if the game ball is accepted to V winning a prize opening 1156 the big hit game which occurs A case will be described in which it is suggested to the player whether the gaming state after the game is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  That is, when the number of times the symbol is displayed stopped on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short game state without reaching the big hit game state by the operation of the game ball T being hit by the player reaches 80 times, the opening / closing member in the small hit The game ball received by the receiving portion 1236a by the sliding of the 1221 rotates the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). If it is accepted to the mouth 1156, it will suggest until the time saving game is over (for example, even if the fluctuation of the symbol is done 80 times in the short game state, a big hit will occur) If not, we will explain the case of the remaining 20).

  And, even though the probability of occurrence of the time-saving big hit does not change, the notification that the gaming state after the big hit is the time-saving gaming state is the hitting operation of the game ball T and the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 Will be described in the case where it is possible to increase the probability of becoming a time-losing big-hit, since it is possible to receive a time-saving with a big hit.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention can be expressed as the following technical thought 2. FIG.
Operation means operable by the player;
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning the game;
Passage control means capable of controlling a passage permitted state in which game media can be passed to a specific area based on the result of the drawing by the drawing means;
Profit giving control means for controlling a profit giving state when game media passes through the specific area;
Normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the lottery after the profit provision state ends when passing the game medium to the specific area;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means, the game is more advantageous than the normal state after the profit provision state is finished despite the fact that the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium passes through the specific area. And a notification obtaining means capable of increasing a rate controlled to the gaming state,
Acquisition means by which the notification can be executed The predetermined condition may be executable by abandoning a profit by not allowing a game medium to pass to the specific area by the acquisition means.

  Even in the above technical idea 2, similar to the above technical idea 1, variation of symbols in the time-saving game without becoming a big hit gaming state by the player's operation of the game ball T by operating the handle device 500. When the number of displays reaches 80 times, during the small hit game, the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 It is possible to suggest to the player whether the gaming state after the generated big hit game is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state.

  And, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the probability that the big hit with time reduction will occur by the suggestion that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state. Even though it does not change, let V winning slot 1156 accept game ball T by hitting operation of game ball T by notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short time game state, and get a time hit with big hit Time, it is possible to increase the probability of becoming a big hit with time saving.

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the fourth embodiment of the present invention executes substantially the same processing as the processing by the main control substrate and the processing by the peripheral control substrate of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short game state without becoming the big hit game state is the RAM (illustration omitted) of the peripheral control board 1116 In the case where the stored number (accumulated fluctuation number) reaches a predetermined number (80 in this embodiment), the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

  Specifically, based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the time saving game state, the number of times the decorative symbol is changed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (cumulative change number) is calculated as the peripheral control board 1116 Count in RAM.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM is 80 or more. It is determined whether or not.

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 80 or more, it executes the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of times of change is 80 times or more, the effect image of the light-extinguished lamp is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown) in the subsequent time saving game. And, if the game state after the big hit game which occurs when the game ball is accepted in V winning a prize opening 1156 is the time saving game state, to the effect image of the lamp which is lighting the effect image of this light off lamp If the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by changing for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state That is, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, execution of the advantage suggestion effect of notifying the player for each small hit whether or not there is time reduction in the generated big hit is started.

  In detail, when the variable display of the symbol is performed 100 times during the time reduction game (when the lottery is performed 100 times during the time reduction game), the symbol does not become a big hit gaming state after the time reduction game starts. When the number of times the variable display is displayed reaches 80 times, if the game ball T is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 by the sliding of the opening / closing member 1221 during a small hit, whether the big hit generated is a time-saving big hit Suggest in the remaining 20 times.

  When the peripheral control board 1116 reaches 80 times the number of times the symbol is variably displayed without becoming a big hit gaming state since the start of the time saving game, and the advantage suggestion effect is executed (when the execution is determined) Clear the cumulative fluctuation number. In addition, when the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state to the big hit gaming state (when the time saving gaming ends), the accumulated variation count counted in the RAM may be cleared. After that, when the gaming state shifts to the time saving game state and the time saving game is started, the accumulated variation count is counted again in the RAM.

  In addition, the cumulative fluctuation number is cleared also when transitioning to the big hit gaming state before the number of times the symbol is variably displayed reaches 80 times since the start of the time saving game.

  The peripheral control board 1116 hides the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when the gaming state shifts from the short time gaming state to the big hit gaming state or when the short time gaming state ends. End the execution of the incentive suggestion effect.

  In addition, by making a configuration in which the cumulative fluctuation number is backed up, it is possible to continuously count the cumulative fluctuation number even when the power is shut off.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the fourth embodiment of the present invention]
The above-described fourth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same effects as the effects of the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

  In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, in order to notify the presence or absence of time saving by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player may be in an advantageous state (a big hit with time saving depending on the slide timing of the prize opening / closing member 1221). ) Can be obtained.

  In other words, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that is generated if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, based on the notification that the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the prize winning opening opening member 1221 Thus, the game ball T can be made to be accepted by the V winning opening 1156 depending on the hitting operation at the same time when the bonus item winning opening 1155 is opened. And the probability of becoming a big hit with no time saving big hit by lottery is not changed, but it is possible to increase the probability of becoming a big hit with short time by notifying that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short playing state (V By causing the winning opening 1156 to receive the game ball T, it is possible to obtain a time-saving big hit), and furthermore, it is possible for the player to continuously obtain a time-saving big hit.

  In addition, as described above, in the short time game state, in order to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the number of times the variable display of the symbol is made reaches 80 times during the short game state, the player until the variable display number of times reaches 80 times The steering operation is performed by the handle device 500 so that the game ball T can not be received in the V winning opening 1156. For this reason, it is possible to improve interest from being able to provide a novel game characteristic different from the monotonous game characteristic of merely operating the handle device 500 and waiting for becoming a big hit as in the conventional time saving game.

  In detail, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed when the number of times that the variable display of the symbol is made during the short time game state is less than 80 times, the player can keep V until the number of the variable display reaches 80 times. If the game ball is received in the winning opening 1156, it can not be known whether the gaming state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. Therefore, if the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 before the number of times the variable display is made reaches 80 times, the gaming state after the big hit game may be the normal gaming state depending on the lottery result . On the other hand, when the gaming state after the big hit game is the short time gaming state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than that in the normal gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, since the advantageous suggestion effect is executed when the number of times the variable display of the symbol is made reaches 80 times during the short time gaming state, it occurs when the gaming ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantageous suggestion effect Based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short time gaming state, the V winning opening 1156 may be made to accept the gaming ball depending on the striking operation at the same time when the prize winning opening 1155 opens. it can. That is, the player can obtain a time-saving big hit by his own operation.

  For this reason, when the game ball receives the big hit in the time reduction slot by receiving the V winning opening 1156, even if the big hit game is over, the variable display of the symbol is made 100 times, compared to the normal gaming state in the short time game. Since the probability of becoming a big hit is high and it is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the player is a handle device so that the game ball T can not be received in the V prize opening 1156 until the variable display number reaches 80 times. At 500, a driving operation will be performed.

  As described above, when the time reduction game is started and the number of times the symbol is displayed for variation display reaches 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed, so the V winning opening is performed until the number for the symbol displayed for variation reaches 80 times. A player who is performing a striking operation so as not to receive the game ball at 1156 obtains the benefit that an advantage suggestion effect is executed while taking risks. In addition, the player is unable to receive the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156 despite the fact that the game ball T is being operated so as to receive the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156 during the short time game state. It can reduce the feeling. Furthermore, even after the game ball T has been received in the V prize opening 1156 before the number of times the time reduction game is started and the variable display of the symbol reaches 80 times after the big hit game, the time reduction no big hit and time reduction Since the chance of winning determined by lottery is not changed, it is possible to secure fairness.

  And, during the period when the advantage suggestion effect is executed (when the short game has been started and the number of times the variable display of the symbol has been made reaches 80 times, the remaining 20 times can always be acquired with a time-saving big hit) Not necessarily (when time saving game is started and the number of times the variable display of the symbol is made reaches 80 times, the remaining 20 times will not necessarily win the time saving big hit) and accepts the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 Even if it is not possible to get a big profit, it is not always possible to get a big profit, so there is a high expectation for getting a big hit with a short time (as it is not always promised that a big hit can be obtained with short time). Interesting things will increase from that. However, since the probability inside the gaming machine does not change originally (the time without a big hit and the time with a short hit there is no change in the probability of winning a big hit), it is not something that greatly provokes prosperity.

  In addition, when the number of times that the time reduction game is started again after the big hit game and the variable display of the symbol is reached reaches 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed again, the player is again A hitting operation makes it possible to obtain a time-saving big hit. As described above, by performing the driving operation based on the advantage suggestion effect, it is possible for the player to continuously obtain a jackpot of time saving by himself.

  In addition, when the time saving game is started, by displaying the number of times the variable display of the symbol is made during the time saving game state on the area other than the area where the symbol is displayed (the decorative symbol is displayed) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 ( It is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the variable display is made during the time saving game state while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result) and the symbol indicating the lottery result.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, it is assumed that the player has performed a hitting operation to prevent the game ball from being received in the V winning hole 1156 during the short time game, assuming that the "predetermined condition is satisfied". In the above, it has been explained that the variation display number of the symbol during the short game has reached 80 times without becoming the big hit game state, but the player does not receive the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the short game As in the case where a small hit is obtained 60 times by advancing the game, it is possible to appropriately change as long as a condition intended by the player (in which the player can be involved) is satisfied. In addition, although it is not restricted to the said 80 times, it is a timing (period) which the number of times notified that it is a big hit with time reduction becomes 1 to 3 times as a timing which starts execution of an advantage suggestion production. Is desirable. That is, it is desirable that the number 1 to 3 times is set as the number that can not be reached by the number of times that it is possible to insert the game ball T while ensuring that the V winning hole 1156 can receive the game ball T.

  Moreover, although the case where an advantage suggestion production was performed when the symbol was changed and displayed 80 times during the time saving game state was described, it is not limited to 80 times. However, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated if the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is started and the gaming ball is accepted in the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect is the time saving gaming state To ensure that the player can perform the hitting operation at the same time the opening of the prize winning opening 1155 is held multiple times, the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time saving game is 80 times without becoming the big hit gaming state. The number of times may reach 30 times.

  And, it is possible to randomly decide from among a plurality of variable display counts as the variable display count of the symbol during the time saving gaming state. Specifically, for example, one out of 80 times, 50 times and 30 times is randomly determined. It should be noted that the number of times may be determined at the start of a time saving game, or may be determined when the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153 (may be the first starting opening 1152) during the time reducing game. . When the number of times is determined at random, the determined number may be notified to the player, or the determined number may not be notified to the player.

  Furthermore, when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined, the game ball T is accepted every time the variable display of the symbol (the second start port 1153 may be the first start port 1152) during the short time gaming state thereafter Each time, it may be determined whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect, and the advantage suggestion effect may be executed based on this determination.

  Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the advantage suggestion effect, by providing a period during which the advantage suggestion effect is likely to be performed and a period when it is difficult to be executed during the short time gaming state thereafter Game period may be added), and new playability can be added. That is, when the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the symbol is variably displayed 80 times during the short time game state, it is not necessary to continuously execute the advantage suggestion effect in the remaining 20 time short game states.

  For example, when the advantageous suggestion effect is executed from 80 times to 100 times of the time saving game 100 times, the 80 times to 85 times are hard to be executed, 86 times to 90 times are easy to be executed, 91 times to 95 times are difficult to be executed, 86 to 100 times may be facilitated.

  In addition, as described above, when randomly determining the number of changes in the short time game state, which is an opportunity to execute the advantage suggestion effect, for example, when it is determined to be 30 times, 31 to 40 times are executed It may be difficult to perform 41 to 60 times, 61 to 80 times may not be easily performed, and 81 to 100 times may be easily performed.

  As described above, even when the period in which the advantage suggestive effect is easy to be executed and the period in which it is difficult to be executed, the timing (period) is such that the number of times that it is notified that it is a big hit is 1 to 3 times By doing this, it is possible to diversify the game and, as it has been decided that the number of changes is 30 times, it is possible to execute advantage suggestion effects longer than the other changes, so today Since it is possible to make the player think that he is lucky, the sense of expectation can be improved with respect to the acquisition of the time-saving big hit.

  As described above, the case has been described where execution of the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of times of variation of the symbol during the short time game reaches 80 times without receiving the game ball T in the V winning hole 1156, but the number of times of variation Can change the continuation aspect of the advantage suggestion effect in the later time saving game. For example, during the time-saving game pertaining to the first hit, if the number of changes is between 80 and 90 times and it becomes a time-saving big-hit game, then the number of times of change in the symbol during time-saving game is 80 in subsequent games. When it reaches, it executes advantage suggestion production, but, during the time saving game which relates to the first hitting, when the fluctuation frequency becomes the time with the time saving big hit game between 91 times 100 times, the time saving game in the subsequent game It can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the number of times of variation of the symbol in the game reaches 50 times. By configuring in this way, the player tries to obtain a big hit game with a time reduction between 91 and 100 times, but the game is played on the V winning opening 1156 between 91 and 100 times. You can be thrilled if you can accept the ball.

  Furthermore, it is possible to change the execution of the advantage suggestion effect in the subsequent game depending on the number of changes in the time-saving game state until the time-saving and big-hit game. For example, during the short time game pertaining to the first hit, if the number of times of variation of the symbol during the short time game becomes a big hit by 85 times without receiving the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, the next time short game Perform all the advantages suggestion production only in. In addition, during the short time game pertaining to the first hit, when the number of times of fluctuation of the symbol during the short time game becomes 95 or more without receiving the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, including the next time short game All five time-saving games can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where execution of the advantageous suggestion effect is scheduled in five time-short games including the next time-short game, there is no time-saving during the next time-short game of time short games pertaining to the first hit. Become a big hit, and even if it becomes a normal gaming state after a big hit game, and if it becomes a big hit with time reduction, an advantage suggestion production will be executed, and it may be expected that the player may continue to get a big hit with short time. It can be used to improve the operating rate.

  As described above, the game does not enter the big hit gaming state by progressing the game so that the player does not receive the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 during the short time game, assuming that "predetermined condition is satisfied". A novelty that the game characteristics change depending on the player by assuming that the condition that the player can participate is satisfied, such as when the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the time saving game reaches 80 times, etc. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be realized, it is possible to make the game more interesting.

  It should be noted that during the time saving game without becoming a big hit gaming state by progressing the game so that the player does not receive the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 during the time saving game as "predetermined conditions are satisfied" Although the case has been described where the variation display number of symbols has reached 80 times, the lottery result may be indicated 80 times by the special symbol or the normal symbol on the function indicator 1114 during the short time game state, It may be a case where the lottery concerning the game is performed 80 times without becoming the big hit gaming state.

  Also, although the case of the handle device 500 has been described as the "operation means", it is configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied by an operation portion operable by the player such as the pressing operation portion 405. can do. For example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the time saving game is executed 100 times without executing the advantage suggestion effect, but when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the advantage suggestion effect is executed but the time saving game Although there is a possibility that a loss may occur to the player, such as performing 20 times, there is a possibility that a profit more than a loss will be obtained by being able to obtain the advantage that the advantage suggestion effect is performed by the operation. Can be configured to be expected to be.

  In addition, the operation timing of the pressing operation unit 405 or the like (determination timing whether the short time game is executed 100 times or the time advantage game is performed 20 times without executing the advantage suggestion effect is performed), It can be at the time of the jackpot gaming state start, or at the time of the time saving game start. Even with such a configuration, since it is possible to realize the novel pachinko machine 1 in which the player's playability changes, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, in addition to executing the advantage suggestion effect when the number of times of variation display of the symbol reaches 80 times by progressing the game so as not to receive the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 during time saving game, When it is possible to press the pressing operation unit 405 etc. 100 times in 1 game (for example, from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the end of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol) Can be configured. Even if configured in this manner, it is possible to realize the novel pachinko machine 1 in which the game characteristics change.

Fifth Embodiment of the Present Invention
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like in the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration is omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical thought of the fifth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea 1.
Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning the game;
Pass control means for controlling to a pass permission state in which game media can pass through the special area in the game area, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result;
A payout means capable of paying out at least one more game media than the number of game media having passed through the special area;
Specific area detection means for detecting that game media has passed through a specific area provided in the predetermined area;
A profit giving control means for controlling a profit giving state in which a profit is provided upon detection of passage of game media by the specific area detecting means;
The lottery result is the specific result by the lottery means and the gaming state after the end of the profit giving state can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times And an advantageous notification means capable of notifying that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled,
The advantageous notification means can execute the notification within as few times as possible of the lottery that can be notified after control is started in the advantageous state.
A game machine characterized by

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the firing means (for example, the handle device 500) fires game media (for example, the gaming ball T) in the gaming area, and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113) Performs a lottery regarding the game (for example, the random number updating process in step S1) (for example, the lottery is performed when the game ball T is received by the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153).

  The passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232), when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a small hit), Control is made to allow passage of gaming media (for example, the movement of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236 is controlled to allow reception of gaming media to the receiving portion 1246a, V prize opening 1156) The payout means (for example, the main control board 1113) can pay out at least one more game media than the number of game media having passed through the special area.

  The specific area detection means (for example, the main control board 1113, the V winning opening sensor 1239) detects that the game medium has passed through the specific area provided in the predetermined area, and the profit giving control means (for example, the main control board 1113) is controlled to a profit giving state (for example, a big hit) which gives profit when the passage of the game medium is detected by the specific area detection means, and the advantageous notification means (peripheral control board 1116) is a lottery means It is a specific result, and the lottery result that the gaming state after the end of the profit giving state can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving gaming state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times If it is, it is informed that control to an advantageous gaming state is possible.

  Then, the advantageous notification means (peripheral control board 1116) executes the notification within the fewest number of lotterys that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state (for example, first after the time saving game is started) It is drawn when the gaming state after the big hit game is controlled to the short time gaming state (hereinafter, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed only when the time reduction becomes the big hit).

  As a conventional game machine, it is advantageous for the player if the game ball passes through a specific area by the type 1 pachinko machine which shifts to a game state advantageous to the player when the main digital becomes a specific mode and the opening of the movable piece etc. There is known a 1 type 2 type composite machine in which two elements of an old 2 type pachinko machine which is shifted to the gaming state are mixed.

  However, it is becoming difficult to satisfy the player who seeks more fun of the game because it is not a novelty to be a kind 1 multi-function machine like the above-mentioned game machine.

  In addition, in the 1 type 2 type compound machine, because there are more game balls paid out based on the game balls made by small hit etc. than the game balls required to advance the game in the short time game state, The game ball may increase while proceeding with the game in the state, and it is possible to obtain a big hit from the middle to the late stage in the short game state in order to obtain many game balls using this specification There is a player who performs a technical intervention (so-called V removal) to perform a striking operation so that the V winning opening does not receive the gaming ball until the appropriate variation number considered) is reached. As a result, there is a large difference between the profits obtained between the player who can perform technical intervention such as V disconnection and the player who can not perform the technical intervention, and the fairness of profit among players can not be secured. Occur.

  Furthermore, as described above, when a profit that can not be obtained by the normal game method occurs, the game arcade where the game machine is installed suffers a loss as much as the profit is generated. And if the game arcade takes measures to prevent technical intervention such as V disconnection, not only players who can perform technical intervention such as V disconnection but also players who can not perform technical intervention such as V disconnection can take measures. The damage caused by the project may cause a decline in interest as a whole regardless of the inability of technical intervention.

  Therefore, in the present invention, the lottery result is the identification result, and the lottery result that the gaming state after the end of the profit giving state can be controlled to the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times If is obtained, it is informed that control to the advantageous gaming state is possible within the fewest number of lotterys that can be notified after the control is started to the advantageous state. Details will be described later.

  In the following fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. A case will be described in which an advantage suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the gaming state after the generated big hit game is the short time gaming state is executed only once in the time saving game.

  In other words, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides, the rotating body 1236 rotates (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right shown in FIG. 124 (b) If it is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 by rotating to the position), suggesting whether or not the two types of big hit that occur is a big hit with time reduction only once in a short time game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea 2.
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning the game;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, control is made to allow passage of gaming media to the special area within the gaming area, and the predetermined period or the special area is determined in advance. Passage control means for terminating the control of the passage permission state based on the passage of a number of game media;
A payout means capable of paying out at least one more gaming medium per one number of gaming media passed based on the number of gaming media having passed the special area;
Specific area detection means for detecting that game media has passed through a specific area provided in the predetermined area;
A profit giving control means for controlling a profit giving state in which a profit is provided upon detection of passage of game media by the specific area detecting means;
The gaming state after the end of the profit giving state is controlled by the lottery means to an advantageous gaming state in which the ratio of the gaming state after the profit giving state is randomly selected from the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times And an advantageous notification means capable of notifying that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled when a lottery result indicating that it is possible is obtained.
The advantageous notification means executes the notification within the fewest possible numbers of the lottery that can be notified after the control is started in the advantageous state, and the notification is performed a few times (including one time) Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery can be notified during the advantageous state thereafter, the notification is not executed,
A game machine characterized by

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention executes substantially the same processing as the processing by the main control substrate and the processing by the peripheral control substrate of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, Based on the stored number (cumulative fluctuation number), the remaining fluctuation number in the time saving game is displayed.

  In the fifth embodiment of the present invention described below, the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 is executed by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result first becomes a time-slip and a big hit after the start of the time-saving game. A case will be described in which the player is notified only once that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs if the B is accepted is the short time gaming state.

  In the peripheral control board 1116, when the time saving game is started, the number of times the decorative symbol is changed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after the start of the time reducing game based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309. The accumulated fluctuation number is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

  Then, when the lottery result first becomes a big hit with a short time after the start of the short time game, the peripheral control board 1116 displays the effect image of the lamp lit on the liquid crystal display device 1115 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) By displaying, if the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156, the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is that the time-saving gaming state is, that is, the game ball T is accepted in the V prize opening 1156 Then, an advantage suggestion effect of notifying the player that there is a time saving in the generated big hit is executed.

  In addition, if the advantage suggestion effect is performed once, the lottery result will be again during the simultaneous short game even if the time reduction and the big hit can not be obtained in the lottery in which the advantage suggestion effect is performed. Even if it becomes, the advantage suggestion presentation is not executed. That is, the big hit that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 for the player only when the lottery result first becomes a big hit with a short time since the start of the short time game is a big hit with a short time Inform that there is.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of changes until the short time game is over, and displays the cumulative number of changes on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like based on the count to start the short time game to the player. Report the number of changes. However, it is desirable to display the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving game based on the counted number of accumulated fluctuations (for example, 30 times from the time-short start, in order to make the player grasp the termination opportunity of the time-saving game more clearly In the case, it will be displayed that the remaining 70 times)).

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1116 is an opportunity to end the time saving game (when the variable display is performed 100 times), or when the gaming state is shifted from the short time gaming state to the big hit gaming state before the end opportunity for the time saving game. Clears the counted number of accumulated changes. Then, when the gaming state shifts and the short time game is started again, the peripheral control board 1116 counts the cumulative number of changes again in the RAM.

  In addition, by setting it as the structure which backs up the cumulative fluctuation frequency, even if it is a case where a power supply is interrupted | blocked, the cumulative fluctuation frequency can be counted continuously.

  Further, each time the time saving game is executed, it can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect only in the case of the first time saving and big hit after the time saving game is started.

  In this manner, the peripheral control board 1116 executes the game game T in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result first becomes the time-saving big hit after the start of the short-time game. If is accepted, it indicates to the player only once that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the short time gaming state.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the fifth embodiment of the present invention]
The fifth embodiment of the present invention described above has the same effects as the effects of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

  In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, in order to notify the presence or absence of time saving by executing the advantage suggestive effect, depending on the timing at which the game ball T is hit by the player, the advantageous state (big hit with time saving) is continued. Can be obtained.

  That is, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by execution of the advantage suggestion effect is the time saving gaming state, the prize winning opening and closing Since the game ball T can be made to be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the hitting operation in which the timing of opening the prize winning opening 1155 is adjusted by the member 1221, the player can continue to obtain a jackpot with time saving by himself. Can be added to the game.

  In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to obtain many winning balls by performing a striking operation so that the V winning opening 1156 does not receive the gaming ball T until the final stage in the short time gaming state In so-called, V can be removed) in the gaming machine, after the start of the short game, get a big hit with the time reduction based on the suggested suggestion effect that is executed only when the lottery result first becomes the big hit with the time reduction, Since it is much more advantageous for the player to continue to get a big hit with time reduction, the player should perform a striking operation to make the V winning hole 1156 accept the game ball T based on the advantageous suggestion effect. As a result, it becomes difficult to capture such as V removal.

  In more detail, only when the lottery result first becomes a time-losing big hit after the start of the short-time game, the advantage suggestion effect is executed, and if the gaming ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, a big hit occurs The player is only suggested once that the gaming state after the game is a time saving gaming state. Then, unless a time-saving big hit is obtained based on this one suggestion, at this time during the short game state, execution of advantage suggestion effect is not performed later, so the player accepts the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156. If it happens, it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  For this reason, the player is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the gaming ball T is accepted to the V prize opening 1156 notified only once during the short time gaming state of 1 is the time saving state. The game is performed by performing a hitting operation in accordance with the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 opens.

  As described above, the player is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated if the gaming ball T is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 only once during the short time gaming state of 1, is 1. It is a chance for us to be able to make sure that we get a big hit with a short time. Therefore, the player will play a game to make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T seriously so as to obtain a big hit with a short time, and the short time game will be completed with a small number of games.

  Then, since the time saving game will be completed with a small number of games, it is difficult to carry out the technical intervention to perform the striking operation so as not to allow the V winning opening 1156 to receive the gaming ball T, and the V is released by the technical intervention. The fairness of profit can be secured between the player who can play and the player who can not play the game.

  In addition, in order to execute the advantage suggestion effect in the time saving game once, the advantage indicating effect is executed and the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is in the time saving state A sense of tension can be given to the notification that there is any.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 is generated by a hit operation performed based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the short time gaming state. The player can be excited about whether T is accepted or not.

  In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, when the lottery result first becomes a big hit with a short time after the start of short time game, an advantage suggestion effect is executed once, so for the player a big hit with a short time It will be one chance that you can definitely get. In this way, to obtain many winning balls by performing a striking operation so that the game ball T is not received by the V winning opening 1156 until the final stage in the short time game state, so-called V room or room for lost If the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 without giving, it is possible to urge the hit operation based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated is the short time gaming state.

  In addition, the player is forced to release V, for example, by providing a structure for preventing V release in the V winning opening 1156 so as to give a penalty to a player doing so-called V release or to prevent V release from being performed. Instead of making it not, the player will play a game so as not to perform V release by himself.

  In addition, the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game state (the number of times the symbol fluctuates and displayed) is displayed in the region other than the region where the symbol is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1115 By adopting the configuration (not shown), it is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the symbol is variably displayed while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result.

  In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect only when the lottery result first becomes a time-slip and a big hit after the start of the time-saving game. Although the case has been described in which the player is only suggested once that the gaming state after the generated big hit game is the short-time gaming state if it has been done, it is not limited to this. For example, it can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect in two times when the lottery result becomes the time-losing big hit at the first time and the next time after the time-saving game starts, and after the time-saving game starts In the first, next, and subsequent times, it can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect in three times when the lottery result becomes a time-saving big hit.

  As described above, in the case of executing the advantage suggestive presentation in two times or in the case of performing the plurality of advantage suggestive effects in the case of performing the advantage suggestive presentation in three times, the player is given the advantage suggestive presentation effect By not notifying the number of times of execution, it is possible to cause the player to play a game to seriously accept the game ball T from the V prize opening 1156 from the beginning, thinking that it may be a chance.

  Also, in the case of executing a plurality of advantage suggestion effects and not notifying the player of the number of times the advantage suggestion effects are executed, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 based on the first advantage suggestion effect. In the state where it can not be made to disappoint and it is disappointed that the advantage suggestion production is not executed any more, by performing the advantage suggestion production again, it is possible to give a sudden strike and greatly swell the sense of expectation.

  In addition, when performing the advantage suggestion effect | action of multiple times, you may perform frequency | count by lottery. In addition, if it is not possible to cause the V winning opening 1156 to accept the game ball T based on the first advantage suggestion effect, it may be determined whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect next time by lottery. Furthermore, if it is not possible to cause the V winning opening 1156 to accept the game ball T based on the next advantage suggestion effect, it may be decided whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect one after another by lottery.

  However, in the case of executing a plurality of advantage suggestion effects, the lottery is first drawn from the start of the execution of the advantage suggestion effects so that there is no room for the V winning opening 1156 to perform a hitting operation so as not to accept the game ball T. In the case of multiple time savings jackpots, including when the result is a time savings jackpot, we will implement an advantage suggestive staging in the case of multiple time savings jackpots, and the expected number that the time savings jackpot will be able to be earned (1 to 3 times) It is desirable to perform an advantage suggestive presentation based on

  In other words, if the player is given many opportunities to get a time-losing big hit, the player who can perform the V release should only get a time-losing big hit at the last opportunity out of the opportunities that can get a time-losing big hit. As a result, it is necessary to carry out the V release until the last opportunity, and the profit given to the player is increased.

  And, as described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only once during the short time game state of 1, when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs When notification is made that the game is in the short time game state, the game ball T is immediately operated to be accepted in the V prize opening 1156, and as a result, the game ball T is accepted in the V prize opening 1156. The time saving game is over and the big hit game is started with a small number of games. As described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect only once during the short time game state of 1, since the short time game is ended with a small number of games, there is no room to carry out the V release, and the V release has many It is possible to curb the over-benefit of earning a prize ball.

  In addition, "becomes alertable after the control is started in the advantageous state" means that it is possible to notify because the lottery result is the first with time-saving big hit after the control is started in the time-saving game state. In addition, “as few as possible number of lottery”, the lottery result became time-saving based on the expected number (1 to 3 times) that the time-saving and big-hit could be acquired after being controlled to the time-saving gaming state It is three times including the first lottery.

Sixth Embodiment of the Present Invention
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like in the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the description of the same configuration is omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical thought of the sixth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Prior determination means for performing a lottery regarding a game when a predetermined lottery condition is established;
Passage control means for controlling a specific area in the game area to a passage permitted state in which game media can pass based on a lottery result by the prior determination means;
Profit giving state control means for controlling to a profit giving state in which a profit is given when a game medium passes through the specific area;
Post-application state control means which can be controlled to either the normal state or an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state based on the lottery result after the end of the profit provision state;
In the advantageous state, is it controlled from the informed acquisition state which can be controlled to the advantageous state after the profit provision state when passing the game medium to the specific area? Advantage acquisition expectation maintaining means capable of controlling in a notification inconvenient state that is difficult to grasp, and then controlling in the informing acquisition state again;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the firing means (for example, the handle device 500) fires game media (for example, the gaming ball T) in the gaming area, and the predetermination means (for example, the main control board 11139) When a predetermined lottery condition is established (for example, when the game ball T is received in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153), a lottery regarding a game (for example, random number updating process in step S1) is performed.

  The passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V winning solenoid 1232) is a specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, V prize opening) in the game area based on the lottery result by the prior determination means. 1156) is controlled to a passage permitted state where game media can pass (for example, to control the movement of the prize winning opening opening and closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236), the profit giving state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) It controls to the profit granting state (for example, big hit gaming state) which gives profit at the opportunity that game media pass to the specific territory, after the grant state control expedient (for example, main control board 1113) ends profit granting state Later, based on the lottery result, control is made to either the normal state or an advantageous state (for example, a time saving game state) more advantageous than the normal state.

  And, while being controlled to the advantageous state, the advantageous acquisition expectation maintaining means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) can grasp whether it is controlled to the advantageous state after the profit giving state when passing the game medium to the specific area It is controlled to be difficult to know whether it is controlled from the acquisition state with notification to the advantageous state, and then it is controlled again to the acquisition state with notification (for example, if the gaming ball is accepted to the V winning opening 1156, a big hit occurs Vary whether or not to execute an advantage suggestion effect to notify the state after the game).

  As a conventional game machine, it is advantageous for the player if the game ball passes through a specific area by the type 1 pachinko machine which shifts to a game state advantageous to the player when the main digital becomes a specific mode and the opening of the movable piece etc. There is known a type 1 dual type multifunction device that attempts to diversify the game by mixing the two elements of the former 2 types of pachinko machines that shift to the gaming state.

  However, although diversification of games is attempted by using one type and two types of multi-function machines as in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are quite a few players who are bored with games and their interest is reduced.

  In addition, in the 1 type 2 type composite machine, most of the players in the time saving game are in the state of firing the game ball in the right area of the game area and waiting for the big hit by performing the right strike. , The game tends to be monotonous, and there was a possibility that the interest might fall.

  Therefore, the present invention is controlled to an advantageous state from a notified acquisition state which can be grasped whether it is controlled to an advantageous state after giving a profit when passing a game medium to a specific area while being controlled to an advantageous state The interestingness is improved by adding a new game characteristic of controlling to a notification inconvenient state that is difficult to grasp, and then controlling to a notification-acquired acquisition state again.

  It should be noted that "it is controlled to be in an advantageous state after gaining state when passing a game medium to a specific area, it is controlled to an advantageous state from an informed acquisition state that can be grasped or it is difficult to grasp and then controlled In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, as in the case of "control to the acquisition state with notification again", in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times of variation display of the symbol during the short time gaming state is 31 to 40 times In the period, during the small hit game, before the determination result of the second special symbol determination (lottery result) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, if the game ball is accepted in the V winning hole 1156 after the big hit game that occurs A case will be described where an advantage suggestion effect is suggested to the player to indicate whether the gaming state of the game is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  That is, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 50 times during the time saving game state, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 slides during a small hit and the game accepted by the receiving portion 1236a If the ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156 by rotation of the rotor 1236 (rotation from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b)) Start suggestion of whether or not it is a big hit with time reduction (start the execution of an advantage suggestion effect). Then, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 reaches 90 times during the time saving game state, the started suggestion is ended (execution of the advantage suggestion effect is ended).

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the sixth embodiment of the present invention executes substantially the same processing as the processing by the main control board and the processing by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, The execution of the advantageous suggestion effect is started based on the stored number of times (the cumulative change number), or the execution of the advantageous suggestion effect is ended.

  In the sixth embodiment of the present invention described below, the number of changes from 1 to 30 times after the start of short time game does not execute the advantage suggestion effect, and the number of changes is advantageous from 31 to 40 times Perform the suggestion effect, do not perform the advantage suggestion effect from 41 times to 60 times of the fluctuation number, execute the advantage suggestion effect from 61 times to 70 times the fluctuation number, the fluctuation number from 71 times to 90 Description will be made of the case where the advantage suggestion effect is not performed until the number of times and the variation suggestion effect is performed from 91 times to 100 times.

  Specifically, based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309, the peripheral control board 1116 displays the number of times the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after the start of time saving game (cumulative The variation count is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 30 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of changes has reached 30 times, it starts executing the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of times of change has reached 30 times, the effect image of the lighted off lamp is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game ball T is displayed on the V winning opening 1156. If the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs if it is accepted is a time saving game state, change the effect image of this light off lamp to the effect image of the light on for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) Therefore, if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156, whether the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state, that is, the V winning opening 1156 If the game ball is accepted, execution of the advantage suggestion effect of notifying the player for each small hit whether or not there is a time saving in the generated big hit is started.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the number of accumulated fluctuations, and determines whether or not the number of accumulated fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 40 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of changes has reached 40 times, it ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of times of change has reached 40 times, the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is not displayed (not shown), and the game ball T is displayed on the V winning opening 1156. If it is accepted, execution of the advantage suggestion effect of notifying the player for each small hit whether or not there is a time saving in the generated big hit ends.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of changes, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of changes counted by the RAM has reached 60 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 60 times, it starts to execute the advantage suggestion effect. That is, it is assumed that the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect as described above before the start of the 61st fluctuation based on the lottery result concerning the 61st fluctuation. When it does, it announces whether there is time saving or not in the big hit which occurs.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the number of accumulated fluctuations, and determines whether or not the number of accumulated fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 70 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 70 times, it ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is ended by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 90 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of changes has reached 90 times, it starts executing the advantage suggestion effect. That is, by executing the above-described advantage suggestion effect, it is informed whether or not there is time saving in the big hit that occurs if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect when the cumulative number of variations reaches 100 times, and clears the cumulative number of variations counted in the RAM. In addition, after the start of the time saving game, the cumulative fluctuation number is cleared even when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state before the number of times the symbol is variably displayed reaches 100 times. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is ended by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

  In addition, by setting it as the structure which backs up a cumulative fluctuation frequency, even if it is a case where a power supply is interrupted | blocked during time-saving game state, the cumulative fluctuation frequency can be counted continuously.

  In addition, whenever time saving game is executed, fluctuation indication frequency of the symbol in time saving game state does not execute advantage suggestion production in period of 1 time 30 times, 41 times 60 times, 71 times 90 times, fluctuation In the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, 91 to 100 times of display times, it can be configured to execute the advantage suggestion effect. In other words, whenever the time saving game is executed, the variable indication number can be configured to always execute the advantage suggestion effect in a period of 31 times to 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, 91 times to 100 times .

  Thus, the peripheral control board 1116 starts the execution of the advantage suggestion effect based on the counted number of accumulated changes, or ends the execution of the advantage suggestion effect. As a result, the advantage suggestive effect is not executed from one time to 30 times from the start of the time saving game, and the advantage suggestive effect is executed from 31 times to 40 times as the change frequency. There is no advantage suggestion effect from 41 times to 60 times, advantage suggestion effect is executed from 61 times to 70 times, variation suggestion effect from 71 times to 90 times Not being performed, an advantage suggestion effect will be executed from 91 times to 100 times of fluctuation number, and an advantage suggestion effect will be executed intermittently.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the sixth embodiment of the present invention]
The sixth embodiment of the present invention described above has the same effects as the effects of the first to third embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following effects.

  In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, since the presence / absence of time is notified by executing the advantage suggestion effect in the intermittent period, the player has an advantageous state depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible to continuously obtain (a big hit with time reduction).

  In other words, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the gaming ball T is accepted to the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect executed in the intermittent period is a time saving gaming state Since the game ball T can be made to be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the hitting operation at the same time when the prize opening 1155 is opened by the prize opening / closing member 1221, the player can make a big hit with time saving by himself. It will be possible to obtain

  In addition, in the time-saving game state, the number of times the symbol is displayed in a variable display does not execute the advantage suggestion effect from once to 30 times, executes the advantage suggestion effect from 31 times to 40 times, and 41 times to 60 times Does not execute the advantage suggestion production until up to 61 times, executes the advantage suggestion production from 61 times to 70 times, does not execute the advantage suggestion performance from 71 times to 90 times, it is advantageous from 91 times to 100 times In order to execute the sex suggestion effect, it is possible to change the gameplay in the short time game state.

  In other words, in the time-saving game state, the player is given a V winning game because the advantage suggestion effect is not performed in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60, 71 to 90 times when the symbol is variably displayed. If the game ball T is received in the mouth 1156, it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. Therefore, the player performs a striking operation so that the game ball T can not be received in the V winning opening 1156 in a period when the advantage suggestion effect is not executed.

  However, since the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, or 91 to 100 times, the number of times the symbol is variably displayed in the short time gaming state, the player is V winning opening 1156 If the game ball T is accepted, it becomes possible to grasp whether the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state. For this reason, the player plays a role by the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 is the short time gaming state. The game ball T is attempted to be received by the V prize opening 1156 by performing a striking operation in accordance with the timing at which the item prize opening 1155 is opened.

  In this way, the variation indication number of the symbol in the time saving game state is 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, 71 to 90 times without performing the advantage suggestion effect in the period of the variation indication number of 31 times From 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, 91 times to 100 times to execute the advantage suggestion effect will be different, the player's hitting operation will be different (V game winning opening 1156 can not accept the game ball T As a result, the player can perform a striking operation or perform a striking operation so that the game ball T can be received in the V winning opening 1156), thereby changing the gameplay in the time saving gaming state.

  In addition, in order to start the execution of the advantage suggestion effect from the middle of the time reduction game and to end the execution of the advantage suggestion effect in the middle of the time reduction game, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the middle of the time reduction game Expectation can be inflated with respect to the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the gaming ball T is received is the short time gaming state.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 is generated by a hit operation performed based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs is the short time gaming state. The player can be excited about whether T is accepted or not.

  In particular, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, when the number of times of variation display is from 1 to 30, 41 to 60, 71 to 90, the advantage indication effect is not performed, and the number of times of variation display is 31 From 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, 91 times to 100 times, the advantage suggestion presentation is executed.

  In other words, with the progress of the game without winning a big hit during the short time game, the game is becoming monotonous with about 30 times the number of fluctuations becoming monotonous and the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by execution of the advantage suggestion effect If notification of whether the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs if it is a short time gaming state is based on the expected number (1 to 2 times) that can be obtained with the time reduction jackpot by making the number of fluctuations about 10 times The execution period of the advantage suggestion production and the period when the advantage suggestion production is not performed are set.

  And the variation indication frequency does not execute the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, 71 to 90 times, and the variation display number of times is 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times Because there is a notification of whether or not the gaming state after the big hit game is a time saving gaming state by executing the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 91 times to 100 times, no notification will be alternately performed. During the short time game, the player can be attracted to the game until the end.

  In addition, the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game state (the number of times the symbol fluctuates and displayed) is displayed in the region other than the region where the symbol is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1115 By adopting the configuration (not shown), it is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the symbol is variably displayed while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result.

  Furthermore, in the above-described sixth embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the number of times the symbol is variably displayed is not performed during one to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, or 71 to 90 times. Although the case has been described in which the advantage suggestion effect is performed in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times of the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this period. For example, when the number of times of variation display is from 1 to 30, 41 to 70, 81 to 100, the advantage suggestive effect is not performed, and the number of times of variation display is from 31 to 40, 71 to 80 times Can be configured to perform an advantage suggestive rendition in the period of.

  That is, the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is performed, and the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is not performed can be changed as appropriate, but as described above, the game is performed by progressing the game without acquiring a big hit during time saving game Whether the game is becoming monotonous about 30 times the number of times the game ball T is accepted if the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by the execution of the advantage suggestion effect whether the game state after the big hit game is a time-saving game state or not It is desirable to set a period based on the expected number (one or two) that a time-saving with a big hit can be acquired by setting the number of changes to about 10 to inform the information.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, in the time-saving game state, the number of times the symbol is variably displayed is not performed in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, or 71 to 90 times. Although the case has been described where the advantage indication effect is performed in the period from 31 times to 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times of the variable display number, it is determined whether or not to execute the advantage indication effect in each period You may decide by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is randomly selected whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect before the number of times of the variable display becomes 31, 61, 91, and when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined, the above period It can be configured to execute an advantage suggestion effect. In addition, before starting the time saving game, it may be determined in advance in which of the above periods the advantage suggestion effect is to be executed by a lottery.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns for executing the advantage suggestion effect, and to determine one pattern from the plurality of patterns. Specifically, for example, in the 1 to 30 times, the 41 to 60 times, the 71 to 90 times period, the advantage indication effect is not executed, and the number of times of the variable display is 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, The first pattern to execute the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 91 times to 100 times, and the advantage suggestion effect in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 70 times, and 81 times to 100 times of variation indication Without changing the number of times of the variable display from 31 times to 40 times, 71 times to 80 times, prepare the second pattern to execute the advantage suggestion effect, and randomly choose 1 pattern from these 2 patterns Can be configured.

  It should be noted that the determination of the pattern may be determined when the gaming ball T is received in the first starting opening 1152 (or the second starting opening 1153) first during the short time game state. By thus determining the execution pattern of the advantage suggestion effect by lottery, diversification of the game can be achieved.

  When the pattern is randomly determined as described above, the determined pattern may be notified to the player. For example, when the above-described first pattern is determined, there are more opportunities to perform advantage suggestion effects than the above-described second pattern, so by making the player think that it is lucky today Can improve their expectations for

  Furthermore, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the variation display number of the symbol in the time saving game state is advantageous in the period of 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, 71 times to 90 times each time time saving game is executed. The case has been described in which the advantage indication effect is executed in the period of 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, 91 to 100 times of the variable indication number without executing the sex indication effect, but during the time-saving game state Whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect in this period may be determined by lottery before the short time game is started, or may be randomly selected every predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 times) in the normal gaming state. It may be determined whether or not to execute. Then, for example, when the number of times of change is 500 and it is determined that the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is performed, it is not necessary to perform the lottery whether or not to execute every subsequent number of times of change. And, when it is decided to execute, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation to the time-saving gaming state by notifying from before the time-saving gaming state.

  In addition, whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect in the above period during the short time game state, if it is a big hit in a specific symbol (for example, the symbol of "7"), if it is a big hit in a specific reach, It may be determined when it is a big hit when a predetermined number of reach is displayed. In addition, it may be configured to determine a pattern to execute the advantage suggestion effect when the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is determined (determining either the first pattern or the second pattern as described above Also good). In this case, it is possible to improve the expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today because the advantage presentation is executed.

  Furthermore, when the pattern for executing the advantage suggestion effect is determined as described above, the advantage suggestion effect is executed before the time reduction game is executed by notifying the player before the time reduction game state is set. It can expand the sense of expectation for things.

  In addition, it is a game by displaying a count display indicating that execution of the advantage suggestion effect is ended when the variable suggestion is performed when the remaining variable indication is performed if the variable indication is performed how many times remaining during the time saving game state. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the merit suggestive staging to be executed by the indication that the merit suggestive staging will be executed if the verb is displayed again several times, and the suggestion of the merits may be suggested if the fluctuation showing several times In order to try to get a big hit with a short time while the advantage suggestion effect is being executed by the indication that the execution of the effect is finished, it is possible to make a shock during the short time game.

(Other Embodiments of the Fourth to Sixth Embodiments of the Present Invention)
Next, characteristic configurations, operations, and the like of the other embodiments of the fourth to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth to sixth embodiments of the present invention, the description of the same configuration is omitted. I assume.

[1. Aspect of rotation of rotating body]
In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the rotating body 1236 is rotated from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b). Although the case where the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a from the prize winning opening 1155 is acceptable to the V winning opening 1156 has been described, the other rotation mode can be adopted.

  Specifically, the rotating body 1236 stands by at the right facing position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) when a predetermined condition is met. The game ball T can be made available to the unit 1236a. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small hit symbol random number allows the receiving unit 1236 a to make the player harassing or pounding as to whether or not the game ball T can be received. It is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T and improve the interest of the player.

[2. Suggestion aspect by advantage suggestion production]
In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the effect image of the lamp being turned off is always displayed (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the time saving game as an advantage suggestion effect, and the V winning opening 1156 is played on the game If the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the ball is accepted is the short time game state, by changing the effect image of this off lamp to the effect image of the lit lamp, the presence or absence of the short Although the case where it alert | reports was demonstrated, it can be set as another aspect.

  Specifically, when a small hit occurs during a short time game, the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 after a big hit game that occurs Whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state can be displayed in characters, such as "There is a time reduction!" Or "No time reduction!". As described above, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of time saving by displaying in characters.

  Further, by making the color of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in V winning opening 1156 is a short time gaming state, the decorative symbol is displayed in rainbow color, etc., which is different from a normal decorative symbol By displaying in color, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving while paying attention to the variation of the decorative symbol.

  Furthermore, by making the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 different, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the normal game state, the cat character is displayed, and the game state after the big hit game is short By displaying the dog character when in the game state, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time saving while making the effect mode diverse.

  In addition, by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 which can be pressed by the player, it is possible to notify of the presence or absence of time saving. Specifically, if the gaming state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is the time-saving gaming state, the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates, the gaming state after the big hit gaming is the normal game When the player is in the time-saving gaming state more strongly than in the state, the player vibrates or vibrates more strongly, thereby suppressing the player's action such as tapping on the glass unit 590.

  That is, when notifying the presence or absence of shortness by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand to hit the gaming ball T into the gaming area 1100, and the left hand pressing operation unit Since the user touches 405, both hands are closed. In this state, it is difficult to act like hitting the glass unit 590 to put the game ball in the prize winning opening 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning opening 1156, so that the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being damaged or the like. can do.

  In addition to the vibration, even if the presence or absence of time saving is notified by air from the pressing operation unit 405, the above-described effects can be obtained.

[3. Continuation of advantageous suggestion production]

  In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, it may be determined whether or not to continue executing the advantage suggestion effect in the time reduction game after the time reduction game pertaining to the first hit according to the predetermined condition. For example, the first hit is limited to the first hit if the specified conditions are satisfied (if it is a big hit with a specific symbol, if it is a big hit with a specific random number, if it is a big hit with a specific reach, etc.) The advantage suggestion effect may be continued and executed up to three times after the included short game. In addition, only when the predetermined conditions are satisfied in the time reduction game pertaining to the first hit (if it becomes a small hit with a specific symbol, when it becomes a small hit with a specific random number, etc.) The advantage suggestion effect may be continuously executed up to three times. As described above, by continuously executing the advantage suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the short time game pertaining to the first hit, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine to which new game characteristics are added.

(Operational effects and the like of the embodiment of the present invention)
As in the embodiment of the present invention described above, whether or not the gaming state after the big hit game which is generated when the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggestion effect is a time saving gaming state or not By informing the player, the player can be attracted to the game. Specifically, since it is possible for the player to obtain a big hit after having obtained a big hit right in the 1 type 2 type compound machine (based on the lottery result, the V winning opening 1156 accepts the game ball T) It is important information whether or not the winning jackpot that can be obtained is a more successful jackpot (or whether it is a big hit or not), and because it depends on the winning balls that can be obtained, it attracts more players. It is possible to provide a game machine to turn on.

  In addition, in order to solve the problem that it is difficult to notice that it has become a big hit like the conventional 1 type 2 type multifunction machine, change the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of pattern and the background etc. Even if the timing to receive the game ball T is notified, the fluctuation time will be long, so there are many opportunities to get the jackpot acquisition right which is also a feature of the 1 type 2 type composite machine, and after starting the time saving game It is not possible to take advantage of the fact that it takes time to get

  However, in the embodiment of the present invention, as described above, in order to execute the advantage suggestive effect, useful information while making use of the characteristics of the above-described type 1 type 2 combination machine (whether time savings or big hit) Can be given to the player. For this reason, it is possible for the player to be conscious of being able to get a big hit and to be attracted to the game, to avoid the situation in which the big hit is being made before long, and to enjoy the game (action) to get a big hit. Can.

  Furthermore, in the 1 type 2 type multi-function machine, game ball T passes V winning opening due to the fact that it is difficult to understand that the game ball has passed to V winning opening as a specific area. You may not notice that a big hit was obtained. However, as described above, by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player tries to make the V winning opening 1156 accept the game ball T by a hitting operation, so the V winning opening 1156 can be focused and the big hit Can be clearly understood.

  In addition, the opening and closing pattern for opening and closing the prize winning opening 1155 determined based on the random number acquired by the gaming ball T being received in the second starting opening 1153, the gaming ball T was received in the second starting opening 1153 It is possible to adjust whether the game ball T is accepted or not accepted in the prize winning opening 1155 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the symbol determined based on the random number acquired by The operation can be changed.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

Reference Signs List 1 pachinko machine 4 game board 1100 game area 1112 game panel 1120 table unit 1134 gate member 1150 winning opening unit 1151 general winning opening 1152 first starting opening 1153 second starting opening 1154 large winning opening 155 prize winning opening (variable receiving opening)
1156 V winning opening (special entrance)
1220 character unit 1220A character winning opening unit 1220B V winning opening unit 1221 character winning opening opening and closing member 1230 unit front base 1230c missing hole (discharge opening)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a plunger 1233 drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a shaft portion 1233b extension piece 1233c drive gear 1233d engagement portion 1234 driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a driven gear 1236 rotating body 1236a receiving portion 1238 ball guiding member 1238a peripheral wall portion 1238b upper port (housing port)
1238c Right mouth (outlet)
1238d ball entrance 1238e upper guiding part 1238f right guiding part T game ball

Claims (1)

Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning the game;
Pass control means for controlling to a pass permission state in which game media can pass through the special area in the game area, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result;
A payout means capable of paying out at least one more game media than the number of game media having passed through the special area;
Specific area detection means for detecting that game media has passed through a specific area provided in the predetermined area;
A profit giving control means for controlling a profit giving state in which a profit is provided upon detection of passage of game media by the specific area detecting means;
The lottery result is the specific result by the lottery means and the gaming state after the end of the profit giving state can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times And an advantageous notification means capable of notifying that the advantageous gaming state can be controlled,
The advantageous notification means can execute the notification within as few times as possible of the lottery that can be notified after control is started in the advantageous state.
A game machine characterized by